JP2021171508A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a technique for properly controlling a screen display.SOLUTION: A drawing circuit 155 first backs up material information of a mask original material in a buffer region in VRAM 156 (S1502) when detecting the mask original material in a process of drawing processing (S1406 in figure 59) in a current frame. If a 3D synthesis function is OFF (S1504: No), a VDP scaler is used to enlarge a size of the mask original material. If the 3D synthesis function is ON (S1504: Yes), coordinate values of four points forming each apex of the mask original material in the material information of the backed-up mask original material are corrected in accordance with a size ratio of the mask application destination to the mask original material (S1506). With this, the size of the mask original material is enlarged in accordance with the size of the mask application destination, the enlarged mask original material is applied to the 3D synthesis material, the 3D synthesis material can be properly masked and a performance image can be drawn as intended.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 62

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that displays a production image as the game progresses.

Conventionally, in this type of gaming machine, various measures have been taken to appropriately control the screen display. For example, in the rotation display effect, by storing a plurality of images to be rotated and displayed in a virtual buffer, these images are combined into one rotation target image, and when the rotation target image is drawn on a predetermined layer of the VRAM, the rotation is performed. There is known a gaming machine that changes the coordinates of each vertex of a rotation target image and draws them sequentially so that the target image rotates on a display screen (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-112209

According to the above-mentioned prior art, since a plurality of images to be rotated and displayed can be handled as one image, the number of vertex coordinates can be reduced as compared with the case where a plurality of images are handled as they are, and rotation can be performed. It is considered that the amount of calculation required for the drawing process can be reduced. Further, by adjusting the rotation target coordinates in the same manner, it is considered that the rotation target coordinates can be easily enlarged or reduced. However, further ingenuity is required to properly control the screen display.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a technique for appropriately controlling a screen display.

The present invention employs the following solutions to solve the above problems. The wording in parentheses below is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. In addition, the present invention can be an invention including at least one specific matter for each invention shown in the following solutions. Further, each invention specifying matter shown in the following solution can be made into a subordinate concept by adding an element limiting the invention specifying matter, and can be made into a higher concept by deleting the element limiting the invention specifying matter. ..

Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution is a first material and the first material obtained by synthesizing a display means capable of displaying an effect image and a material for the right eye and a material for the left eye using binocular parallax. When drawing an effect image including a second material different from the above, the predetermined information regarding the second material is corrected based on the relationship between the predetermined attributes of the first material and the second material under predetermined conditions. It includes a drawing means and a display control means for displaying the effect image drawn by the drawing means on the display means.

The gaming machine of the present solution has the following features.
(1) When a game ball is launched, it flows down in the game area while being guided by obstacle nails, windmills, structures, etc., and in the process, it passes through some area or enters various entrances. do. The progress of the game is controlled according to these events that occur in the game area. In addition, various effects are executed as the game progresses.

(2) A display means capable of displaying an effect image is provided. The display means corresponds to, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display.

(3) The effect image is drawn by the drawing means. The drawing means are a first material (3D composite material) in which a material for the right eye and a material for the left eye are synthesized using binocular parallax, and a second material (normal drawing material) different from the first material. In drawing the effect image including The correction is made based on the relationship (for example, size ratio) between each predetermined attribute (for example, size) of the material.

(4) The display of the effect image on the display means of the above (2) is controlled by the display control means. The display control means causes the display means to display the effect image drawn in (3) above.

According to the present solution, under predetermined conditions, predetermined information regarding the second material is corrected based on the relationship between the predetermined attributes of the first material and the second material, so that the second material is referred to as the first material. It is possible to draw appropriately according to the relationship of, and it is possible to appropriately control the screen display.

Solution 2: In solution 1, the drawing means corrects the coordinate information of the second material based on the size ratio of the first material and the second material. It is a feature.

In this solution, the following features are added.
(5) The drawing means of the above (3) corrects the coordinate information of the second material based on the size ratio of the first material and the second material of the above (3).

According to this solution, the coordinate information of the second material is corrected based on the size ratio of the first material and the second material under a predetermined condition, so that the second material is adjusted to the size of the first material. It can be enlarged and drawn, and the screen display can be controlled appropriately.

According to the present invention, the screen display can be appropriately controlled.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the game board unit alone. It is a figure which shows the partial cross section of the liquid crystal display by enlarging. It is the front view which shows the part of the game board unit enlarged. It is a block diagram which shows various electronic devices equipped in a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the functional structure in an effect control device. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the setting and the winning probability of a special symbol lottery. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the evacuation process at the time of power-off. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a command reception interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a switch input event processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 1st special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the 2nd special symbol memory update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structure example of the special symbol game processing. It is a figure which shows the opening operation pattern of a variable winning apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit time fluctuation pattern selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process during the special symbol stop display. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a big winning opening at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the big prize opening closing process at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the large prize opening opening pattern setting processing at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the opening and closing operation process of a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the process of closing a large winning opening at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the end processing at the time of a small hit. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "12 round normal symbol" or "12 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in a normal mode. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1, 2" in fireworks rush or coast mode. It is a continuous figure which shows the example of the effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (1/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (2/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (3/4). It is a continuous figure which partially shows the production example of the production during a big role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" (4/4). It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of a fireworks rush. It is a continuous figure which partially shows an example of a big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and the like. It is a continuous figure which partially shows the example of the big role middle production executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol". It is a continuous figure which shows the production example of the coast mode. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the CPU initialization processing of an effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of various interrupt processing of an effect control device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the effect control process simply together with the block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the operation memory effect management process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the effect symbol change pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the configuration example of the process at the time of operation of a variable winning device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of Vsync interrupt control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a command construction process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of 3D synthesis function switching processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of the mask source material information correction processing. It is a figure which shows the flow of the composition processing of the drawing material for 3D. It is a figure which shows the correction mode of the mask source material information. It is a figure which shows the flow of the mask processing of the 3D synthetic material in an embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the mask processing of the 3D synthetic material in the comparative example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the mask processing of the 3D synthetic material in the comparative example 2. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of each process about drawing.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. Further, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and the player borrows the game ball from the game hall operator and plays the game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each of the game balls is a medium having a game value, and the privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, the game ball acquired by the player. It can be converted into a game value based on the number of. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (plastic frame, game machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the most front side of the player when viewed from the front facing the player. The inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is arranged so as to surround the outside of the inner frame assembly 7.

The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape, and the outer frame unit 2 provides fasteners such as screws to island equipment (not shown) in the amusement park. It is fixed using. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for the parts corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and metal material is used for the parts corresponding to the left and right long sides.

The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the saucer unit 6 is integrated at the lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island equipment via the outer frame unit 2, and each of them operates in an openable and closable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). The opening / closing axis of the hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end portion when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

A unified lock unit 9 is provided inside the right edge portion (left edge portion in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. 1. Correspondingly, locking tools (not shown) are also provided on the right side edges (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, with the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 closed to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side thereof together with the locking tool is the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly. It makes it impossible to open 7.

A cylinder lock 6a with a keyway is provided on the right edge of the saucer unit 6. For example, when the manager of the amusement park inserts the dedicated key into the keyway and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. .. When all of these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the lock of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 is locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game field can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the saucer unit 6 is also opened to the front side.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes a game board unit 8 as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. A vertically elongated circular window 4a is formed in the central portion of the integrated door unit 4, and a glass unit (without reference numeral) is mounted in the window 4a. The glass unit is, for example, a combination of two transparent plates (glass plates) cut according to the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and the game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface so that the game ball can flow down.

[Composition of ball plate]
The saucer unit 6 has a shape that protrudes from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to the player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. Further, in the saucer unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. In the lower plate 6c, a game ball further paid out with the upper plate 6b full is stored. The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (a model connected to the CR unit), and the game ball borrowed by the player is a plate unit 6 (upper) from the payout device unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize ball. It is paid out to the plate 6b or the lower plate 6c).

A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When the player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a medium with a built-in storage IC, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 frequencies). (For example, 125) of game balls are rented out. Therefore, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the frequency display unit displays the residual frequency of the valuable medium loaded in the CR unit. By operating the return button 12, the player can receive the return of the valuable medium having the remaining frequency. In the present embodiment, the CR machine is taken as an example, but the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

Further, on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6, an upper plate ball removing button 6d is installed in front of the upper plate 6b at the upper stage position, and a lower plate ball removing lever 6e is installed in the center thereof in front of the lower plate 6c. Is installed. The player can push the upper plate ball removal button 6d, for example, to cause the game ball stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c. Further, the player can slide the lower plate ball removing lever 6e to the left, for example, to drop the game ball stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge it. The discharged game ball is received, for example, in a ball receiving box (not shown).

A handle unit 16 is installed at the lower right of the saucer unit 6. By operating the handle unit 16, the player can operate the launch control board set 174 to launch (launch) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launching device). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the figure) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown game ball flows down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be described later with reference to another drawing.

[Structure on the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for directing. Of these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decorative lamp 48, and the upper right lighting unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decorative lamp 50. In addition, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 so as to be connected below the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the upper position of the saucer unit 6 so as to wrap around. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46, the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 48, 50, 52, etc. are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

Further, the integrated door unit 4 is provided with an error notification lamp 45 at the upper left portion thereof. The error notification lamp 45 has one full-color LED built-in, and when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, it emits light in a manner corresponding to the type of the pachinko machine 1 to notify the error. The "error notification" here refers to notification that the game is not in a normal state, and specifically, an error during execution of the game (for example, an illegal winning error, a winning frequency abnormal error, a ball jam error, etc.) In addition to notifying that an error directly related to the game, a radio wave error that seems to have been caused by a so-called goto action, a magnetic error, etc. has occurred, operations related to maintenance (for example, setting change, setting confirmation, RAM clear, etc.) are performed. Includes notification that it has been executed.

The lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above execute the effect by, for example, emitting light from a built-in LED (lighting or blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). Further, in the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49 each incorporate a speaker 54 on a glass frame, and the left and right glass frame decorative lamps 52 each have a speaker 55 in the glass frame. Is built in. On the other hand, the inner frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower right position of the inner frame assembly 7 (the upper left position of the handle unit 16 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1), and the outer frame speaker is in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. 58 is incorporated. These speakers 54, 55, 56, 58 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (general sound) to execute the effect.

[Operating member]
Further, in the center of the plate receiving unit 6, an operation unit 60 is installed so as to project upward from the upper plate 6b on the front surface side (operation means). The operation unit 60 has a large push button 64 in the center thereof, and a handle lever 62 on the left side of the push button 64. The operation unit 60 can accept operations in various situations shown in the production. In one scene of the production, the handle lever 62 is pulled toward the front side by the player, and in another scene, the push button 64 is pushed in. By operating the operation unit 60 in various modes, the player can switch the effect content (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42), for example, while the symbol is changing, the jackpot is confirmed, or the jackpot is hit. It is possible to generate some kind of effect (notice effect, probabilistic promotion effect, promotion effect during a major role, etc.) during the game.

A ring-shaped portion 65 is installed around the push button 64 so as to surround the push button 64. Unlike the handle lever 62 and the push button 64, the ring-shaped portion 65 is a member provided for decoration, and rotates counterclockwise in conjunction with the pulling operation of the handle lever 62. Further, the ring-shaped portion 65 has a plurality of cells separated in the circumferential direction at regular intervals. Although these cells cannot accept operations by the player, they are effectively used in situations where the player is informed of the operation method.

When requesting some operation from the player, a reduced version image showing the operation method of the operation unit 60 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. At this time, in order to inform the player of the time during which the specified operation can be performed (operation effective time), the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is expressed as if each cell is a lamp. NS. More specifically, the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced image is represented as if all the cells are lit when it becomes operable, and the cells are turned off one by one as the remaining time decreases. It is expressed as if all cells were turned off when the remaining time was exhausted. The actual ring-shaped portion 65 does not have a light source and does not turn on / off unlike the ring-shaped portion 65 shown in the reduced version image displayed on the screen, but the ring-shaped portion 65 in the reduced version image. By switching the lighting / extinguishing of the unit 65 in this way, the player can intuitively grasp the remaining time of the operation.

Further, the push button 64 is configured to have a structure that greatly protrudes upward when a predetermined trigger occurs in the progress of the game. When the push button 64 protrudes, it pops out to a height about three times higher than in the normal state. The push button 64 has a light source inside. The push button 64 normally emits light in one color (for example, blue) or multiple colors, but when protruding, it emits more colorfully and can exert a great presence. By such an operation of the push button 64, the player can be made to recognize that the pressing operation of the button required in this scene is particularly important.

In the present embodiment, the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 are mounted on the same operation unit 60, but the handle lever 62 and the push button 64 may be provided as independent operation members. Further, these operating members may be arranged at close positions or may be arranged at distant positions.

In addition, a direction key 66 is installed on the upper surface of the saucer unit 6 adjacent to the lending operation unit 14. The direction key 66 is a cross-shaped arrangement of four key switches indicating the up, down, left, and right directions, and the key switches for each direction can be independently pressed and operated. The player can arbitrarily move the cursor or the like displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display by pressing the direction key 66 in various scenes of the production.

[Backside configuration]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a payout device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a payout control board unit 176. , The back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown), which constitute the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, a connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed. The electronic devices will be described later with reference to another block diagram (FIGS. 6 and 7).

The main control board unit 170 has a built-in main control device, and a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device. The performance display monitor 200 is arranged in the main control device in a manner visible in the upper left region of the main control board unit 170 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, and includes four 7-segment LEDs. The four 7-segment LEDs are arranged side by side in the left-right direction, and each 7-segment LED is composed of seven segments capable of displaying decimal Arabic numerals and a dot segment located at the lower right of the seven segments. Has been done. The performance display monitor 200 is visible through a transparent case that covers the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device is provided with a RAM clear switch 304 and a setting key keyway 306. The RAM clear switch 304 is a switch used for clearing RAM, that is, initializing the RAM (RWM) installed in the main controller, and in the present embodiment, it is also used as a switch for changing settings. Will be done. The setting key keyway 306 is a keyway for inserting a setting key required for changing or referencing a game-related setting of the pachinko machine 1. The change of the setting will be described later with reference to another drawing.

The RAM clear switch 304 is provided so as to be pressable through a through hole formed in a transparent case covering the main control board unit 170. The RAM clear switch 304 may be arranged outside the transparent case. Further, the key hole 306 for the setting key is provided in a state where the key cylinder penetrates the transparent case (a state in which the transparent case surrounds the periphery of the key cylinder). Therefore, it is possible to insert and rotate the setting key while the transparent case is still sealed.

The arrangement positions of the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyway 306 shown in FIG. 2 are merely examples, and can be arranged at any position. Further, the performance display monitor 200, the RAM clear switch 304, and the setting key keyway 306 may be provided outside the main control device and connected to the main control device.

The payout device unit 172 has, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (without a reference symbol), of which the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. , A game ball replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to the prize ball case through an upper prize ball gutter (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout device unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

Further, the external terminal plate 160 is for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.), and from the external terminal plate 160, the game progress state of the pachinko machine 1. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, starting port information, etc.) indicating the maintenance status, etc. are output to external electronic devices. ..

The power cord 164 secures the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in the island equipment of the amusement park. Further, the ground wire 166 is connected to the ground terminal also installed in the island equipment to secure the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate, and the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit in a state where the game board unit 8 is fixed to the inner frame assembly 7. On the front surface of the game plate 8b, a game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (without a reference symbol) installed in a substantially circular shape. The launch rail extends clockwise from the lower left corner position of the game board 8b to the upper right corner position of the game board 8b.

In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position thereof, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left side portion, a right side portion, and a lower portion centering on the effect unit 40. The left side part of the game area 8a is the first game area (left-handed area) used in the normal game state (low probability non-time reduction state), and the right part of the game area 8a is the special game state (big hit game state). , Small hit game state, low probability time shortened state, high probability time shortened state, etc.) is the second game area (right-handed area, specific area). The left side portion of the game area 8a is also used in a high-probability non-time reduction state (advantageous game state). Further, in the game area 8a, a medium start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device are placed around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

Of these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged in the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a. The starting gate 20, the variable starting winning device 28, the second variable winning device 31, and the first variable winning device 30 are arranged in this order from the top on the right side portion of the game area 8a. Here, the first variable winning device 30 is arranged on the right side of the middle start winning opening 26, and the second variable winning device 31 is arranged on the upper right of the first variable winning device 30. Further, three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side are arranged on the left side portion of the game area 8a, and one ordinary winning opening 24 (predetermined winning opening) on the right side is arranged below the variable start winning device 28. ..

Further, four obstacle nails are arranged above the variable start winning device 28, and a ball entry port 19a and a discharge port 19b are arranged above the obstacle nails. The entry port 19a and the discharge port 19b are connected by a connecting passage on the back side (not shown). The game ball that has entered the ball entry port 19a is decelerated and rectified through this connecting passage, and is discharged from the discharge port 19b.
Further, an out port 19c (predetermined ball entry port) is arranged on the right side of the starting gate 20. The game ball released from the discharge port 19b basically falls straight and passes through the start gate 20, but when it is flipped to the right by an obstacle nail, it enters the out port 19c.

The game ball thrown into the game area 8a enters the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, passes through the starting gate 20, and is a variable start winning device at the time of operation in the process of its flow down. 28, the first variable winning device 30 at the time of opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of opening operation. Here, the game ball flowing down the left side area of the game area 8a may mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right region of the game area 8a enters the ball entry port 19a and is discharged from the discharge port 19b, and mainly passes through the start gate 20 or enters the variable start winning device 28 at the time of operation. There is a possibility of entering the ball, entering the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, entering the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or entering the normal winning opening 24. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 20 continuously flows down in the game area 8a, but the middle start winning opening 26, the normal winning opening 22, 24, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning opening The game ball that has entered the device 31 and the out port 19c is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through a through hole formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent plate, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (board surface), when the game ball is to be inserted into the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, the area on the left side of the game area 8a (left-handed). It is necessary to hit the game ball into the area) (perform so-called "left-handed").

On the other hand, when a game ball is to be entered into the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the normal winning opening 24, the area on the right side of the game area 8a (right-handed area). ), It is necessary to hit the game ball (perform so-called "right hit").

In the present embodiment, the variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a hit manner), and the right start is performed accordingly. It enables the ball to enter the winning opening 28a (predetermined entry opening) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 is provided with a tongue piece type (veloc type) opening / closing member 28b. In the state shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 28b is in a position (retracted position) retracted from the board surface, making it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the right starting winning opening 28a. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 28b moves to a position (driving position) protruding toward the front side from the board surface, the opening / closing member 28b receives the game ball flowing down from above and guides the game ball to the right start winning opening 28a (right). It is possible or easy to enter the starting winning opening 28a). The variable start winning device 28 may be a device in which the opening / closing member is displaced so as to fall forward with the lower end edge portion as a hinge to open the right starting winning opening.

The first variable winning device 30 is a predetermined first condition (for example, from the first round of the big hit game) when the specified condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of big hit or small hit). It operates when the 5th round, or the condition that it is the 7th to 16th rounds, and the condition that the small hit game is open) is satisfied, and it is possible to enter the ball into the first big winning opening 30b. (Special electric accessory, first special ball entry event generating means).

The first variable winning device 30 is a device arranged on the right side of the middle starting winning opening 26 (so-called lower attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The first variable winning device 30 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 30a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 30a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the first prize opening 30b is closed). Then, when the first variable winning device 30 is activated, the opening / closing member 30a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the first large winning opening 30b is opened (open state). During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the first large winning opening 30b can be generated.

The second variable winning device 31 is the same as the first variable winning device 30 when the specified conditions are satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode), and is a predetermined second condition (for example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed). It operates when the condition that it is the sixth round of the jackpot game) is satisfied, and enables the ball to enter the second major winning opening 31b (specific winning opening) (special electric accessory, second special entry). Sphere event generation means).

The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged at the upper right of the first variable winning device 30 (so-called upper attacker), and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The second variable winning device 31 is a type of device in which the opening / closing member 31a slides inside the board surface (sliding type attacker). Then, the opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the front-rear direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. The opening / closing member 31a is in a closed position (closed state) in a state of protruding from the board surface toward the player, and at this time, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31a. It is impossible or difficult to enter the ball (the second prize opening 31b is closed). Then, when the second variable winning device 31 is activated, the opening / closing member 31a is pulled into the inside of the board surface, and the second large winning opening 31b is opened (open state). During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which the inflow of the game ball is not impossible (possible or easy), and the event of entering the second large winning opening 31b can be generated.

Further, inside the second variable winning device 31, a guidance passage 31c for guiding the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is arranged. The guide passage 31c extends downward from the second large winning opening 31b, turns left from there, extends downward to the left, and then extends downward again.

A second count switch 85 is arranged upstream of the guidance passage 31c, and a blade member 31d for the probability variation region and a hole 31e for the probability variation region are arranged in the middle flow of the guidance passage 31c. A discharge port 31f is arranged downstream of the above.

It is detected that the game ball that has entered the second variable winning device 31 is first entered by the second count switch 85. Here, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is ON, the probability variation region blade member 31d rises and guides the game ball to the probability variation region hole 31e. On the other hand, when the probability variation region solenoid that operates the probability variation region blade member 31d is turned off, the probability variation region blade member 31d does not rise, so that the game ball passes through the upper part of the probability variation region blade member 31d. It is guided to the discharge port 31f.

[Probability variation area (specific area)]
Further, a probability variation region (without reference numeral) is provided inside the probability variation region hole 31e. The probability variation region is an region through which the game ball cannot pass when the second variable winning device 31 is in the closed state, and the probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 is in the open state. If so, it is an area through which the game ball can pass.

The probability variation region blade member 31d operates when the second variable winning device 31 opens during the jackpot game. The operation pattern of the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is that the production region is opened for a short period (for example, 0.1 seconds) at the same time as the start of the round, and then closed for a few seconds (about 2 to 3 seconds), and then the probability variation region is opened for a long period of time. It is a pattern that opens for a long time (for example, about 20 seconds). Since the game ball does not reach the probability variation region blade member 31d in the short-term opening executed at the same time as the start of the round, the game ball is not guided to the probability variation region by this operation. Further, even if the blade member 31d for the probability variation region operates, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region when the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened.

In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the central position to the right side portion thereof. The effect unit 40 is provided with various decorative parts 40b and 40c inside the effect unit 40, in addition to the upper edge portion 40a functioning as a guide member for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by its three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a dramatic operation by emitting transmitted light by, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). .. In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images including an effect symbol corresponding to a special symbol are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. (Display means). As described above, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the structure of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including movable bodies and light emitting bodies) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b are included. ) Can be added.

In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, etc.) is attached to the inside of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decoration imitating a vehicle on which a female character is on board). The movable body 40f for the effect can perform an effect accompanied by the operation of a tangible object in addition to the effect using the image by the liquid crystal display 42 and the effect by the light emitter. By the effect using these movable bodies 40f, it is possible to exert an appealing power different from the effect using the two-dimensional image.

Further, a ball guide passage 40d is formed on the left edge portion of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed on the lower edge portion thereof. The ball guide passage 40d opens diagonally upward to the left in the game area 8a, and when a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide passage 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. It is released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface, where the game ball can roll freely in the left-right direction. The game ball rolled on the rolling stage 40e eventually flows down into the lower game area 8a. A ball release path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball release path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 directly below the ball release path 40e. ..

In addition, an out opening 32 is formed in the game area 8a, and the game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning openings are finally collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through the out opening 32. In addition, the game area includes the normal winning openings 22 and 24, the middle starting winning opening 26, the right starting winning opening 28a, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the game ball that has entered the out opening 19c. All the game balls driven into 8a are collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 to the outside of the frame through an out-passage assembly (not shown), and further join the supply route of the island facility (not shown).

[Liquid crystal display]
FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing a cross section of a part of the liquid crystal display 42 (the portion surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 3).

FIG. 4 (A): is a horizontal cross-sectional view (cross-sectional view taken along the IV-IV cutting line in FIG. 3) showing an enlarged part of the liquid crystal display 42. As shown in this figure, the liquid crystal display 42 includes a liquid crystal panel 42a including a backlight and a lenticular sheet 42b (sheet-shaped lenticular lens) provided so as to cover the front side of the liquid crystal panel 42a. Has been done. On the lenticular sheet 42b, semi-cylindrical lenses elongated in a semi-cylindrical shape are arranged in the horizontal direction (width direction).

FIG. 4B: FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating how an image looks when the liquid crystal display 42 is viewed from the front side. On the liquid crystal panel 42a, rows of sub-pixel SPs corresponding to each of red (R), green (G), and blue (B) (hereinafter, may be referred to as "sub-pixel rows") are arranged in the width direction. Three adjacent sub-pixel SPs (for example, sub-pixels SP1, SP2, SP3 in FIG. 4) corresponding to these three colors constitute one pixel P. Further, each sub-pixel SP can express each color with 8 bits (256 gradations), and therefore each pixel P can express a 24-bit color (about 16.77 million colors).

In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal panel 42a has 3840 sub-pixels SP in the width direction x 1024 sub-pixels SP in the height direction (1280 pixels in the width direction x 1028 pixels P in the height direction) in a grid pattern. Are arranged in. That is, on the liquid crystal panel 42a, 3840 sub-pixel rows are arranged in the width direction. Then, according to such an arrangement, 1920 semi-cylindrical lenses corresponding to two rows of sub-pixels are arranged in the width direction on the lenticular sheet 42b. Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, two sub-pixel rows are arranged on the back side of each semi-cylindrical lens.

When performing 3D display, the liquid crystal panel 42a is a composite image in which the images for the right eye and the images for the left eye, which are divided into strips corresponding to each sub-pixel sequence, are alternately arranged in the width direction. Is displayed in. At this time, among the plurality of sub-pixel sequences arranged in the width direction, the odd-numbered sub-pixel strings from the left side (for example, the sub-pixels SP1, SP3, SP5 ... In FIG. 4 are formed in the height direction. An image for the right eye is displayed in each row), and the even-numbered sub-pixel rows from the left side (for example, each row formed in the height direction of the sub-pixels SP2, SP4, SP6 ... In FIG. 4). The image for the left eye is displayed in. When the 3D composite image displayed on the liquid crystal panel 42a in this way is viewed through the lenticular sheet 42b, the image for the left eye reaches the left eye, while the image for the right eye reaches the right eye. As a result, a three-dimensional effect can be obtained by the parallax of both eyes.

FIG. 5 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). As shown in the figure, the game board unit 8 is provided with, for example, a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a at a lower left position in the window 4a, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second. A special symbol display device 35 and a game status display device 38 are provided.

Of these, the ordinary symbol display device 33, for example, alternately lights two lamps (LEDs) to display the ordinary symbol in a variable manner, and turns on or off the lamps to stop and display the ordinary symbol. The normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 storage numbers by, for example, a combination of turning off, turning on, and blinking two lamps (LEDs). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and four memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. The number is displayed, and so on. Although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured by using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps that are lit.

The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being increased one by one in the sense that each time the game ball passes through the starting gate 20, it is memorized that the passage that triggers the operation lottery has occurred. Suddenly (up to 4), each time the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started with the passage as a trigger, the display mode is changed by 1 each. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state where the normal symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of storages (up to 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a represents the number of passages in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol has not yet started at that time.

Further, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 each display, for example, a variable state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or the second special symbol by a 7-segment LED (with dots). (Design display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

Further, the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a are each 0 to 4 depending on the display mode composed of, for example, a combination of turning off or lighting the two lamps (LEDs) and blinking. (Memory number display means). For example, in the display mode in which both of the two lamps are turned off, the number of stored items is 0, in the display mode in which one lamp is turned on, the number of stored items is displayed, and in the display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. Two memorized numbers are displayed, three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which one lamp is lit in addition to the blinking of one lamp, and three memorized numbers are displayed in the display mode in which the two lamps are blinked together. It displays 4 pieces, and so on.

The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is displayed after increasing by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the middle start winning opening 26, the game ball enters the middle starting winning opening 26. It changes to the mode (up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, it changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. Further, the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is increased by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, the game ball enters the right start winning opening 28a. (Up to 4), and each time the special symbol starts to change with the ball entering, the display mode changes to the display mode after decreasing by one. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the first special symbol is already in a state where the fluctuation can be started (when the stop is displayed), and the middle start winning opening 26 The display mode does not change even if the game ball enters the ball. Further, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of stored items is 0), the game ball is inserted into the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start changing (when the stop is displayed). The display mode does not change even if the ball is used. That is, the number of storages (maximum of 4) represented by the display modes of the special symbol operation memory lamps 34a and 35a is that of the incoming ball for which the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started at that time. It represents the number of times.

Further, the game state display device 38 includes, for example, LEDs corresponding to the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d, the time saving state display lamp 38e, and the launch position designation lamp 38f, respectively. In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation storage lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, second special The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game status display device 38 are mounted on the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

These LED lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are divided into four different control areas (hereinafter, referred to as "common") for the purpose of controlling the switching of lighting or extinguishing. From a different point of view, the integrated display board 89 has four commons, and each lamp belongs to one of the commons. In this embodiment, the dynamic lighting method is adopted, and the lamps are driven in order in common units at intervals of interrupt cycles (for example, 4 ms). Therefore, not all the lamps mounted on the integrated display board 89 are driven at the same time.

[Control configuration]
Next, the configuration related to the control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that is the center of control operation, and the main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. There is. The main control device 70 is built in the main control board unit 170.

Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, is mounted. It is configured as an LSI that integrates semiconductor memories such as RWM) 76. Further, the main control device 70 is equipped with a random number circuit 75, an interrupt controller (interrupt CTR) 192, a parallel I / O port 79, a timer circuit (PTC) 194, and a serial communication circuit (SCU) 196. Of these, the random number circuit 75 generates hardware random numbers (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the jackpot determination of the special symbol lottery and the hit determination of the normal symbol lottery, and the random numbers generated here are It is input to the main control CPU 72. Further, the interrupt controller 192 receives each interrupt request (XINT interrupt, PTC interrupt, SCU interrupt) from the parallel I / O port 79, the timer circuit 194, and the serial communication circuit 196, and receives these interrupt requests. Control based on priority. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as a clock generation circuit (not shown), a reset controller that monitors various states and generates a reset as needed, and these are circuit boards together with the main control CPU 72. Implemented above. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or inner layer portion). The I / O port of the main control device 70 may be of a serial type.

Further, the main control device 70 is provided with a setting changing device 300, a setting key switch 302, and a RAM clear switch 304. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) changes the setting by operating the setting changing device 300. The setting changing device 300 is a device for switching the setting (at least a setting value of a plurality of stages regarding the winning probability of the special symbol lottery) (setting changing means), and is operated by operating the RAM clear switch 304 or the like. Further, the setting means a combination of operation probabilities. Further, the operation probability means the probability that the combination of special symbols that the condition device is activated (the jackpot game is executed) is displayed. The setting key switch 302 is an input device that inputs a signal (ON / OFF) indicating the rotation state as the setting key, which is indispensable for switching the setting, rotates. Various methods can be adopted for the procedure for changing the setting, and for example, the procedure can be performed as follows.

(1) First, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off.
(2) Next, the door of the pachinko machine 1 is opened with the dedicated key (door key). Specifically, the dedicated key is inserted into the keyway of the cylinder lock 6a and rotated to the right to open the integrated door unit 4 together with the inner frame assembly 7.
(3) Since the setting key keyway 306 for inserting the setting key and the RAM clear switch 304 are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key is inserted into the setting key keyway 306 for setting. Rotate the key to the right.
(4) Then, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

(5) As a result, a signal (ON) indicating that the setting key has been rotated to the change position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting can be changed based on this input signal. At this time, a safety lock is applied by a lock mechanism (not shown). Therefore, the setting key cannot be removed unless it is returned to its original position.

Here, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 304 is turned on while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be changed. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 304 while the setting key is rotated to the right, the setting can be referred to.

(6) By pressing the RAM clear switch 304 an arbitrary number of times in a state where the setting can be changed, the setting can be changed to any one of a plurality of predetermined stages.
The set value can be displayed on, for example, a dedicated 7-segment LED, a game status display device 38 (special symbol display device, etc.), and a performance display monitor 200.

(7) In the case of a slot machine, when the desired setting is reached, the lever ON process is required, but since the pachinko machine 1 does not have a lever, an alternative process (for example, the setting key is left) instead of the lever ON process. The process of rotating in the direction, the process of turning on the setting change confirmation button (not shown, etc.) may be executed, or the lever ON process may be omitted. In the present embodiment, when the target setting is reached, the setting key is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position. By this operation, a signal (OFF) indicating that the setting key has been returned to the original position is input by the setting key switch 302, and the setting change is confirmed based on this input signal.

(8) Then, when the change of the setting is confirmed, the setting key can be extracted from the setting key key hole 306. Further, when the setting change is confirmed and the set value is displayed on the dedicated 7-segment LED, the game status display device 38, and the performance display monitor 200, the display disappears.
(9) Finally, close the door of the pachinko machine 1. This completes the setting change. When the setting change is completed, the normal game starts.

When the setting is changed, the main control CPU 72 stores the changed setting value in the setting value buffer of the RAM 76. The setting value buffer can be a memory area to be backed up.

[Setting change status]
When the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch pressed state", the state shifts to the setting changing state (setting change state, setting change mode) after the RAM is cleared. do.

In the state where the setting is being changed, the display is not performed on the main display (the lamp included in the game status display device 38), and the game ball cannot be launched or the game ball prize ball or the like cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor 200, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and a set value such as "-1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. Is displayed. Further, when the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed, the set value changes in the range of 1 to 6. Then, when the "setting key is OFF", the setting is confirmed, and the "-" segment is turned off (hidden) as in the "blank (non-display) 1" display of the ratio segment.

In this state, if the "inner frame closed state" is reached (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being changed ends, and once the state is changed to the state before the power was turned off. , Move to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the RAM clear switch 304 also serves as the setting change switch, but the setting change switch may be separately provided without using the RAM clear switch 304.

[Setting confirmation status]
On the other hand, when the power is turned on with the "setting key ON", "inner frame open state", and "RAM clear switch not pressed", the state shifts to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation state, setting confirmation mode). ..

Similar to the state where the setting is being changed, the state where the setting is being confirmed is not displayed on the main display, and the game ball cannot be fired or the game ball prize ball cannot be fired at all. Further, in the performance display monitor, "rn." Is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (identification segment) on the left side, and "blank (hidden) 1" is displayed on the two 7-segment LEDs (ratio segment) on the right side. The set value is displayed. In the state where the setting is being confirmed, the set value does not change even if the RAM clear switch 304 is pressed.

In this state, if the "setting key is OFF" and the "inner frame is closed" (actually, the closed state continues for 100 ms), the state in which the setting is being confirmed ends, and the power is temporarily turned off. After shifting to the previous state, it shifts to the playable state.

In the present embodiment, the setting confirmation cannot be performed in the game-enabled state, but the setting confirmation may be executed in the game-enabled state.

The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of the game ball. Further, the game board unit 8 has a middle start winning opening switch 80 and a right starting winning opening corresponding to the middle starting winning opening 26, the variable starting winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The starting winning opening switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entry of a game ball into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning opening 28a). Further, the first count switch 84 is for detecting the entry of a game ball into the first variable winning device 30 (first large winning opening) and counting the number of balls. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the entry of the game ball into the second variable winning device 31 (second large winning opening 31b) and counting the number of the game balls. Further, the probability variation region switch 95 is a switch for detecting that the game ball has passed through the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 (detection means).

Similarly, the game board unit 8 has a first winning opening switch 86 that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 22, and a second winning opening switch that detects the entry of a game ball into the ordinary winning opening 24. It is equipped with 81. Regarding the three ordinary winning openings 22 on the left side, a configuration in which a common winning opening switch 86 is used is given as an example. For example, three winning opening switches are installed to play a game ball for each ordinary winning opening 22. The incoming ball may be detected individually.

In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in the present embodiment, the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the probability variation area switch 95 are used. The winning detection signal is transmitted via the panel relay terminal board 87, and the panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with a wiring pattern, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

The above-mentioned ordinary symbol display device 33, ordinary symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a, and game. The status display device 38 controls the display operation based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. Further, these display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above, and the integrated display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and lamps 33a, 34a, 35a are installed in the game board unit 8. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal board 87 to the display board 89.

Further, a performance display monitor 200 is connected to the main control device 70 via a panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 sets the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening) to the number of outs (out switch) indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. It is a monitor for displaying a base calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected in 99). The base is calculated for each section preset using an area (unused area) different from the used area used for controlling the progress of the game, and the base of the current section and the base of the previous section are , It is displayed by switching at preset intervals. The display operation of the performance display monitor 200 is controlled based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs a control signal to the performance display monitor 200 according to the calculation status of the base, and controls the lighting state of each of the 7 segments.

Although the performance display monitor 200 is described in the example of connecting to the main control device 70 via the panel relay terminal plate 87, the performance display monitor 200 may be connected to the main control device 70 without passing through the panel relay terminal plate 87. The performance display monitor 200 may be arranged as an internal configuration of the main control device 70.

Further, the game board unit 8 includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, a second variable winning device 31, a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 corresponding to the upstream of the probability variation region, and a first large winning opening. A solenoid 90, a second winning opening solenoid 97, and a solenoid 99 for a probability variation region are provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99 operate (excite) based on the control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open and close the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively (excited). (Operate) or move the blade member 31d for the probability variation region. The solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 are also relayed by the panel relay terminal plate 87, and control signals are transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the integrated door unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the inner frame assembly 7. When the integrated door unit 4 is independently opened, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72), and the inner frame assembly 7 is released from the outer frame unit 2. Then, the contact signal from the plastic frame release switch 93 is input to the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door open information signal as an external information signal.

A payout control device 92 is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which the payout control CPU 94 is mounted, and the payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as ROM 96 and RAM 98 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as an external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

A payout device board 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor) in a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, and a drive circuit for the payout motor 102 is provided on the payout device board 100. There is. The payout device board 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94), and pays the instructed number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let me put it out. The paid-out game ball is sent to the saucer unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

Further, for example, a payout path ball out switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a counting signal from the payout counting switch 106 is input to the payout device board 100. Further, when the ball is broken at the upstream position of the prize ball case, the contact signal from the payout path ball out switch 104 is input to the payout device board 100. The payout device board 100 transmits the input counting signal and contact signal to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual number of payouts and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device board 100.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1, for example, a full tank switch 161 is installed inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173, but when the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, the game balls paid out more than that are described above. It flows into the lower plate 6c as described above. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with the game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned on, and the full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, the payout control CPU 94 temporarily suspends further prize ball operations even if it receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and stores the remaining number of unpaid prize balls in the RAM 98. The memory of the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is turned off, and even if a power failure (including a momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the remaining number of unpaid prize balls will not be lost. ..

Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a launch solenoid 110 is installed together with a launch control board 108 (ball launching means). Further, a ball feed solenoid 111 is provided in the saucer unit 6. The launch control board 108, the launch solenoid 110, and the ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with a drive circuit for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Of these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of feeding the game balls stored in the saucer unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 strikes the game balls sent to the launch position, and continuously (intermittently) launches the game balls one by one toward the game area 8a as described above. The firing interval of the game balls is, for example, an interval of about 0.6 seconds (within 100 balls in 1 minute).

On the other hand, the handle unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Of these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the amount of operation (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. Further, the touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the handle unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs the detection signal. Then, the launch stop switch 116 generates a launch stop signal (contact signal) according to the operation of the player.

A launch relay terminal plate 118 is installed in the saucer unit 6, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is transmitted to the launch control board 108 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Will be done. Further, the drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal plate 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the amount of operation, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. As a result, the strength with which the game ball is launched is adjusted according to the amount of operation by the player. The drive circuit of the launch control board 108 stops driving the launch solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the launch stop signal is input from the launch stop switch 116. do. In addition to this, when the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120 is connected to the launch relay terminal plate 118 and the CR unit is not connected to the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 120, the launch control board is also used. The drive circuit of 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

Further, the saucer unit 6 contains a frequency display board 122 and a lending / returning switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with a display (7-segment LED for 3 digits) of the frequency display unit. Further, a switch module connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 is mounted on the lending / returning switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lent out. And, it is transmitted from the return switch board 123 to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. Further, from the CR unit, a frequency signal representing the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted to the frequency display board 122 via the game ball or the like lending device connection terminal plate 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display based on the frequency signal and numerically displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium. Further, when the valuable medium is not loaded into the CR unit or the remaining frequency of the loaded valuable medium becomes 0, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demo (valuable medium). It is also possible to perform a display prompting the input of.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect as the game progresses in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with an effect control CPU 126, which is a central arithmetic processing unit, on a circuit board (composite sub-control board). The effect control CPU 126 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a RAM (RWM) 130 or an eRAM 131 is built in together with a CPU core (not shown). The effect control device 124 is provided at a position covered by the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the effect control device 124 is equipped with various functional components necessary for realizing the effect such as VDP152, driver IC132, and audio IC134. Of these, the VDP 152 is a processor for drawing an effect screen reproduced on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The driver IC 132 is equipped with an IC that controls devices such as lamps 45, 46, 48, 50, 52, a board lamp 53, and a movable motor 57. Further, the voice IC 134 controls the driving of the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. The internal functional configuration of such an effect control device 124 will be described in detail later with reference to the following figure.

The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, communication between them is performed in only one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the opposite direction is not performed. The communication harness adopts a parallel format according to the bus width of various effects commands (hereinafter, referred to as "effect commands") transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Alternatively, the serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration of each driver (I / O).

In the present embodiment, the sub-connection board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the integrated door unit 4, and the drive signals from the driver IC 132 and the voice IC 134 pass through the sub-connection board 136 to the lamps 45, 46, 48, 50, 52 and the like. It is applied to the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58. Further, a volume control switch (not shown) is connected to the sub-connection board 136 in addition to the handle lever 62, the button motor 63, the push button 64, and the direction key 66, and when the player operates these operating members, they are connected. The contact signal of is input to the effect control device 124 through the sub-connection board 136. Here, an example in which the operating members 62, 64, 66 are connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given, but when the saucer illumination board is installed, the operation members 62, 64, 66 are attached to the saucer illumination board. It may be connected.

The button motor 63 is a stepping motor corresponding to the push button 64, and is driven by an operation unit control device (not shown) that controls the operation unit 60 (switching means). The operation unit control device drives the button motor 63 based on the drive signal transmitted from the effect control device 124 to bring the push button 64 into either a normal state (initial position) or a protruding state (maximum movable position). Switch to (displace).

In addition, a driver board 138 is installed on the game board unit 8, and a board lamp 53, a movable body motor 57, and a movable body sensor 59 are connected to the driver board 138. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f, for example, via a link mechanism (not shown). The movable body sensor 59 is, for example, a photo sensor provided at the origin position (initial position) of the movable body 40f, and outputs a detection signal when the movable body 40f is detected. The drive signal from the driver IC 132 is applied to the board lamp 53 and the movable motor 57 via the driver board 138, respectively. The movable body motor 57 may be a solenoid.

The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and its display screen can be visually recognized through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power supply applied to the backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42.

In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the inner frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit, and when external power (for example, AC24V, etc.) is taken from the island equipment through the power strip 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V, etc.) can be generated from the external power. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Further, electric power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and electric power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball or the like rental device connection terminal plate 120. The low-voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 162 is grounded (grounded) to the island equipment through the ground wire 166.

The external terminal board 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) are external from the external terminal board 160 via the payout control device 92. It is output to. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal plate 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are aggregated by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in the amusement park. Although the configuration via the payout control device 92 is given as an example here, the configuration may be such that the external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal plate 160.

[Internal configuration of production control device]
FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an internal functional configuration of the effect control device 124.
As described above, the effect control device 124 has a role as an effect control processor that controls the effect as the game progresses. Therefore, in addition to the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a control ROM 180 and a watchdog timer IC (WDTIC) 188, which are necessary for the effect control device 124 to function as the effect control processor. The control ROM 180 stores basic programs, tables, and the like related to the control of the effect. The effect control CPU 126 controls the effect by accessing the control ROM 180 via a CPU bus (not shown) and executing a program stored in the control ROM 180. The watchdog timer IC188 is a timer that monitors whether the control executed by the effect control device 124 is normally performed (whether the process is completed within the estimated time), and is connected to the reset terminal of the effect control CPU 126. There is. If the signal (clear pulse) for clearing the monitoring timer of the watchdog timer IC188 is not input within a predetermined time, the watchdog timer IC188 outputs a signal (reset pulse) for resetting and activating the effect control CPU 126. do. As a result, the effect control device 124 is forcibly reset and activated.

In addition to these, the effect control device 124 has SRAM 182, which is a storage area for backup data, a crystal oscillator 181 that generates a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and a real-time clock (RTC) 184 that manages time. , SRAM 182, a lithium battery 186 that supplies backup power to the real-time clock 184, peripheral ICs such as an input / output driver and a counter / timer circuit (not shown) are provided. The lithium battery 186 stores the electric power and charges itself while the driving electric power is being supplied from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124. The SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 are connected to the lithium battery 186, and can be driven by the lithium battery 186 when the supply of the driving power from the power supply control unit 162 to the effect control device 124 is cut off. Therefore, even if the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the SRAM 182 and the real-time clock 184 continue to operate for a period until the lithium battery 186 is depleted (for example, about one and a half months). The SRAM 182 can retain the stored information for a while even when the power is turned off.

The effect control program is configured to store information on security, monitoring, defects, and the like that should not be easily erased in the SRAM 182. As a result, for example, when some trouble occurs in the effect control device 124, the pachinko machine 1 is collected (or inspected in the installed state), and the information held in the SRAM 182 is analyzed to proceed with the investigation of the cause of the trouble. It becomes possible.

Normally, the effect control CPU 126 executes the effect according to the program stored in the control ROM 180, as described above, in the control of the effect, the liquid crystal display 42, the lamps 46, 48, 50, 52, 53 and the speakers 54, 55, 56. , 58 and the like (effect operation execution means) are used to control the effect. The flow of this effect control can be broadly divided into two stages: "overall control (reproduction instruction)" and "individual control (reproduction control)". The effect control CPU 126 first receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, and indirectly instructs each device to reproduce the effect according to the content of the effect command (overall control). Next, the effect control CPU 126 generates instruction data obtained by converting the instruction content into a more specific expression suitable for each device, and relays between the effect control CPU 126 and each device. Send to (individual control). As a result, each control device 134, 152, 198, 199 controls each device based on the instruction data, and the effect reproduction (screen display, voice output, lamp emission, movable body displacement) using each device in the pachinko machine 1 is performed. Etc.) is realized.

As described above, the effect control CPU 126 has different functions depending on the stage of the effect control, and these functions are realized as a plurality of tasks in which the resources of the effect control CPU 126 are properly used. In FIG. 7, the tasks corresponding to the individual functions executed by the effect control CPU 126 are the effect control unit 210, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, and the input control unit. It is shown as 228, Time Management Department (ACT) 230 and the like. In the following description, it is assumed that each task is treated as an operation subject of the effect control process.

First, at the stage of overall control, the effect control unit 210 in the effect control CPU 126 becomes the main operator, and the time management unit (ACT) 230 that manages the time progress of the effect controls the flow of the entire effect. Further, in the individual control stage, the display control unit 220, the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, the movable body control unit 226, or the input control unit 228 in the effect control CPU 126 are the main operating units according to the device to be controlled. It becomes. The effect control unit 210 may be configured to directly control the control devices 134, 152, 198, 199 and the like.

The effect control device 124 functions as an effect control processor at the stage of overall control, whereas it functions as an effect reproduction processor at the stage of individual control. Therefore, the effect control device 124 further stores the VDP 152 for drawing the effect screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, the sound IC 134 for generating the sound accompanying the effect and outputting it from the speaker, and the image and sound used for the effect. In addition to the CGROM (image / audio ROM) 190 and the DRAM 191 used as the loading destination of the data stored in the CGROM 190, the audio IC 134 for controlling various devices used for reproducing the effect, the LED driver 198, and the SMC (serial control). The controller) 199 and the driver IC 132 are equipped. Of these, the VDP152, the audio IC134, and the SMC199 are integrated into the effect control CPU 126 and one chip. A PLL circuit (phase-locked loop) (not shown) is mounted on the chip 128 that integrates these circuits. The clock signal generated by the crystal oscillator 181 is multiplied / divided by the PLL circuit and then input to each circuit on the chip 128.

The CGROM 190 stores the drawing material (moving image data) constituting the effect screen and the audio material (audio data) output as the effect progresses in a state of being compressed by a predetermined compression algorithm. The maximum capacity of the CGROM 190 is 64 Gbits, of which 60 Gbits are allocated for drawing material and 4 Gbits are allocated for audio material. The CGROM 190 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a CG bus (not shown).

By the way, in this embodiment, a NAND type SATA (Serial ATA) standard ROM is adopted as the CGROM 190. In the NAND ROM, data is read out in page units (for example, 1 page = 32 Kbytes), but when various drawing materials and audio materials stored in the CGROM 190 are used for production, a specific address is used. It is necessary to read only the necessary data from from by random access.

Therefore, with the adoption of the NAND type CGROM190, in the present embodiment, the DRAM 191 is further equipped and used as a load destination (temporary storage destination) of data read from the CGROM190 in page units. As a result, the VDP 152 and the audio IC 134 can read out the necessary drawing material and audio material from the data loaded in the DRAM 191 by random access. In addition, DDR3 (Double-Data-Rate3) standard SDRAM is adopted as DRAM 191. The maximum capacity of the DRAM 191 is 8 Gbits, and 4 Gbits are allocated for drawing material and audio material. Further, the DRAM 191 is connected to the VDP 152 and the voice IC 134 via a bus (not shown).

The maximum capacities and allocation ratios of the CGROM 190 and the DRAM 191 described above are examples until they get tired of them, and can be appropriately changed depending on the situation. Further, the CGROM 190 may be provided separately for the drawing material and the audio material.

The VDP 152 is a processor dedicated to drawing an effect image, and is integrated with the effect control CPU 126 on the same chip 128. Further, the VDP 152 incorporates a preload circuit 154, a drawing circuit 155, a VRAM 156, a drawing material decoder 157, and a display circuit 153. When an instruction (command) from the display control unit 220 is input to the VDP 152, the drawing material required by the preload circuit 154 is transferred from the CGROM 190 to the DRAM 191 in advance and saved (hereinafter referred to as "preload"). , The drawing circuit 155 draws the effect image on the VRAM 156 while decompressing (decoding) the preloaded drawing material using the decoder 157, and the effect image is stored in the frame buffer for each frame (still image per unit time). expand. Then, the display circuit 153 individually drives each pixel (full-color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 based on the contents expanded in the frame buffer, so that the reproduction of the effect screen is realized.

The voice IC 134 is a sound generator that generates sound effects such as sound effects and BGM that are reproduced during the execution of the staging, and is integrated into the same chip 128 together with the staging control CPU 126 like the VDP 152. The audio IC 134 is also connected to an amplifier (not shown) or an external DRAM other than the DRAM 191. Further, the audio IC 134 has a built-in audio material decoder 135 that decompresses (decodes) the compressed audio material. When an instruction from the audio control unit 222 is input to the audio IC 134, the audio IC 134 reads out the necessary audio material from the DRAM 191 according to the instruction, and decodes the read audio material on the external DRAM using the audio material decoder 135. While generating sound, the generated sound is output to the speaker 54 on the glass frame, the speaker 55 in the glass frame, the inner frame speaker 56, and the outer frame speaker 58 via the amplifier, so that the sound of stereo 2ch or monaural 2ch Achieve playback (the number of channels is not limited to this). Further, the voice IC 134 adjusts the output volume of each speaker 54, 55, 56, 58 based on the contact signal input when the volume adjustment switch is operated. In the present embodiment, the amplifier IC 193 is provided between the audio IC 134 and the amplifier, and the amplifier IC 193 sets and adjusts the amplifier.

By the way, the audio IC 134 reads out the necessary audio material from the DRAM 191 as described above, which is related to the fact that the audio IC 134 does not have a function corresponding to the preload circuit 154 of the VDP 152. If the audio IC 134 reads data from the CGROM 190 at the stage when the audio material is needed, it cannot read a specific audio material because it can only read in page units, and it is difficult to control the audio. It becomes. Therefore, with the adoption of the NAND type CGROM190, in the present embodiment, all the audio materials stored in the CGROM190 are transferred to the DRAM 191 when the power is turned on. As a result, the audio IC 134 can read the necessary audio material by random access from the data loaded in the DRAM 191 without reading the data from the CGROM 190.

The LED driver 198 controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of various lamps 45, 46, 48, 50, 52 and the board lamp 53 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In the LED driver 198, an address designation synchronous serial system is adopted. The LED driver 198 first controls the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern based on the instruction content transmitted from the lamp control unit 224, and transfers the drive data corresponding to the control to the driver IC 132.

The SMC 199 controls the drive pattern of a motor (for example, the movable body motor 57) that is a drive source for various movable bodies for the effect provided inside the effect unit 40, and also controls a sensor for the movable body (for example, the movable body). The detection signal output by the sensor 59) is relayed and passed to the movable body control unit 226. The SMC 199 is also integrated into the same chip 128 together with the effect control CPU 126. In SMC199, a clock-synchronized serial system is adopted. When driving the movable body, the SMC 199 first generates a drive pattern of the motor for the movable body based on the instruction content transmitted from the movable body control unit 226, and transfers this to the driver IC 132. Although the SMC 199 is used only for generating the drive pattern of the motor here, since the SMC 199 can generate not only the motor but also the lighting pattern and the brightness pattern of the lamp, the SMC 199 is applied instead of the LED driver 198 described above. However, it is also possible that the SMC 199 is configured to generate data patterns for both lamps and motors.

The driver IC 132 controls the drive voltage applied to the lamp or the motor based on the drive data transferred from the LED driver 198 or the SMC 199. The driver IC 132 includes switching elements such as PWM (pulse width modulation) ICs and MOSFETs (not shown), and switches (or duty switches) the drive voltage applied to various lamps and the movable motor 57 to operate the driver IC 132. By managing it, it is possible to reproduce the effect using a lamp or a movable body. The various lamps include the glass frame top lamp 46 installed in the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, 52, and the error notification lamp 45, as well as a light source built in each part of the operation unit 60. And the board lamp 53 for decoration and production installed in the game board unit 8. The board lamp 53 corresponds to an LED built in the effect unit 40, an LED built in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Further, although an example in which the glass frame decoration lamp 52 is connected to the sub-connection board 136 is given here, the saucer illumination board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer illumination board is attached to the glass frame decoration lamp 52. It may be configured to be connected to the driver IC 132 via the driver IC 132.

In addition to this, the driver IC 132 transfers the contact signal input when the operating member such as the handle lever 62 or the push button 64 is operated by the player to the effect control unit 210 via the input control unit 228. The effect control unit 210 appropriately changes the effect content to be reproduced based on the content of the transferred contact signal.
The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between set value and winning probability of special symbol lottery]
FIG. 8 is a diagram showing the relationship between the set value and the winning probability of the special symbol lottery.

When the set value is "1", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/319".
When the set value is "2", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/299".
When the set value is "3", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/279".
When the set value is "4", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/259".
When the set value is "5", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/239".
When the set value is "6", the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/219".

When the set value is "1" to "6", the winning probability (high probability state) of the special symbol lottery is "1/100".

As described above, the larger the set value, the larger the winning probability (low probability state) of the special symbol lottery, which is advantageous for the player.

In the illustrated example, the winning probability of the special symbol lottery has been described in the example in which the setting difference is provided only in the low probability state, but the setting difference may be provided even in the high probability state. Further, regarding the setting, not only the big hit probability but also the small hit probability may be set differently. Further, setting differences may be provided for other items (for example, the transition rate to the high probability state, the transition rate to the time shortening state, the number of probability changes, the number of time reductions, the number of special fluctuations, etc.).

Subsequently, the control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[CPU initialization (main) processing in the main controller]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control CPU 72 starts the CPU initialization process. The CPU initialization process restores the game state (so-called power recovery) based on the backup information saved when the power was cut off last time, or conversely clears the backup information to restore the initial state of the pachinko machine 1. It is a process for adjusting. Further, the CPU initialization process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

9 and 10 are flowcharts showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process. Hereinafter, the processing performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

Step S100: The main control CPU 72 first sets the start address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets the interrupt vector table. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the interrupt vector table in the I register (interrupt vector register) used for interrupt control. The interrupt vector table defines the priority required to control the interrupt request generated during the execution of the CPU initialization process, and the main control CPU 72 sets the priority defined in the interrupt vector table. Based on this, multiple interrupt requests will be executed in order. The control of the interrupt process will be described in detail later.

Step S104: The main control CPU 72 saves the RAM clear signal (input signal from the RAM clear switch 304). More specifically, the values of the input port into which the RAM clear signal is input are acquired twice in succession, and the logical sum of these values is saved as the input port value.

Step S106: The main control CPU 72 executes the standby process here. This process is for securing a certain amount of standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) after the power is turned on, and checking the power off warning signal (signal indicating that the power is being cut off) during that time. It is a thing. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the standby time, it bit-checks the input port of the power cutoff warning signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The power off warning signal is input by an IC that monitors the voltage level of the drive voltage. Then, if the input of the power cutoff warning signal is confirmed before the loop counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. Thereby, for example, it is possible to protect the system when the operation of turning on and off the main power switch (not shown) is repeatedly performed within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

Step S108: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value of the work area is reset (00H). As a result, after that, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

Step S110: The main control CPU 72 refers to the RAM clear signal by checking the specific bit of the input port value saved in the previous step S104, and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch 304 has been operated (switch ON). do. If the RAM clear switch 304 is not operated (No), step S112 is then executed.

Step S112: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not the backup valid determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed by the process executed at the time of the previous power cutoff and the backup valid determination flag (for example, "A5H") is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S114. The process executed when the power is cut off will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S114: The main control CPU 72 executes a thumb check for the backup information of the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 thumb-checks all areas of the RAM 76 work area (user work area including the prohibited area and the stack area) except for the backup validity determination flag and the thumb check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S116.

Step S116: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents of a part of the RAM 76. The partial area of the RAM 76 is a continuous work area within a predetermined range based on the address of the backup valid determination flag to be cleared when the power is restored. The main control CPU 72 can restore the state when the power is cut off by clearing the stored contents of this area for each address (in bytes) and keeping the saved valid backup information as it is. (Memory restoration means).

Step S118: The main control CPU 72 should send a power return designation effect command (command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124) and a payout command (to the payout control device 92) indicating that the main control CPU 72 has returned from the power cutoff and started. Command) is set.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 304 is operated when the power is turned on (step S110: Yes), when the backup valid determination flag is not set (step S112: No), or the backup information is not normal. In the case (step S114: No), the main control CPU 72 shifts to step S120.

Step S120: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and the stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is saved, the contents are erased.
Step S122: Further, the main control CPU 72 performs the initial setting of the RAM 76.

Step S124: The main control CPU sets a RAM clear designated effect command (command for the effect control device 124) and a payout command (command for the payout control device 92) indicating that the RAM clear has been started.

Step S126: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the payout command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the payout command (RAM clear designation) set in step S124 to the payout command buffer.

Step S128: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first outputs the effect command (power recovery designation) set in step S118 or the effect command (RAM clear specification) set in step S124 to the effect command buffer. The main control CPU 72 further includes various other effect commands (for example, model designation command, special symbol probability state specification command, special symbol destination determination effect command, effect command when the number of operation memories increases, and decrease in the number of operation memories) required for the effect control. Set the time effect command, the number of times cut counter remaining number command, special game state specification command, launch position specification command, etc.) and output these to the effect command buffer. At this time, the main control CPU 72 sets different values for these effect commands when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.

For example, when the power is restored, the value of each effect command is set based on the backup information. By transmitting these effect commands to the effect control device 124 in the subsequent effect command transmission process (step S142), the effect control device 124 is in the effect state (for example, internal) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. The probability state, the display mode of the effect symbol, the effect display mode of the number of working memories, the sound output content, the light emitting state of various lamps, etc.) can be restored.

Step S130: The main control CPU 72 executes input port processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 acquires the contents of each input port and stores the result of performing a predetermined operation on the value in the state flag of each input port. When this process is completed, the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S131 (connection symbol A → A).

Step S131: The main control CPU 72 sets the main command permission signal to a specific bit of the output port. The main command permission signal is a signal indicating to the payout control device 92 that the main control device 70 permits the command transmission to itself. When the main command permission signal is input to the payout control device 92, the payout control device 92 receives the payout command permission signal to indicate to the main control device 70 that the payout command is permitted to be transmitted. It becomes.

Step S132: The main control CPU 72 resets (OFF) the specific bit of the output port to clear the emission permission signal (specific output information clearing means). The launch permission signal is included in the backup target when the power is cut off. Therefore, when the power of the main control device 70 (pachinko machine 1) is restored, the main control CPU 72 executes the flow of power restoration in the CPU initialization process, and the state of the main control device 70 when the power is cut off based on the backup information. (Step S116), but as part of that, the launch permission signal is also returned to the state when the power was cut off.

The emission permission signal is set in a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the specific output port buffer (for example, the buffer for the output port 3) stored in the RAM 76. However, the address of the output port buffer targeted here is located in the address space of the RAM 76, which is outside the continuous area targeted for clearing in step S116. Therefore, if, as part of the process of step S116, an attempt is made to clear the value of the specific bit of the specific address in which the launch permission signal is set in addition to the area to be cleared, the specific address is specified and then the specific address is specified. , It is necessary to perform an exceptional process of clearing only the data of a specific bit out of the 8-bit data stored at that address and maintaining the data of the remaining 7 bits, which is a part of the RAM 76. The efficiency of the process of clearing the area becomes very poor. Under such circumstances, the main control CPU 72 handles the launch permission signal in the same manner as other backup target data without clearing the launch permission signal in the previous step S116, and temporarily returns to the state when the power is cut off.

However, at the stage where the backup information is returned in the main control device 70 (step S116), communication with the payout control device 92 has not yet been established, and is the payout control device 92 started normally (main control device 92)? It has not been confirmed whether or not the instruction by the command from 70 can be accepted. When the power is cut off while the launch permission signal is ON, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, and as a result, the game ball can be launched even though the normality of the payout control device 92 is unknown. A condition will occur. Here, tentatively, the payout control device 92 is replaced with a modified product (for example, one in which the number of prize balls is modified) that does not conform to the original inspection while the power is cut off, and the main control device 70 is changed by the subsequent power return. When activated, the launch permission signal is returned to ON, which makes it possible to launch the game ball. Such a state is not preferable from the viewpoint of security.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the launch permission signal is explicitly cleared once before the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop, regardless of whether the activation is due to the power recovery or the RAM clear designation (the activation is performed). (Reset to OFF). After that, the main control CPU 72 confirms that the payout command permission signal has been input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and then sends the payout command to the payout control device 92. The control that sets the launch permission signal to ON is adopted. By performing such control, even if the game is started (restarted) by the processing of the main loop, the launch of the game ball is not permitted unless the communication between the main control device 70 and the payout control device 92 is established. , It is possible to avoid the illegal launch of the game ball when the above-mentioned fraud is committed.

Step S133: The main control CPU 72 sets the timer interrupt cycle. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a value corresponding to the timer interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms) in the counter setting register of the timer circuit 194.
Step S134: The main control CPU 72 resets the interrupt daisy chain. More specifically, the main control CPU 72 executes the RETI instruction after backing up the start address of the main loop, which will be described later, as a preliminary preparation for the interrupt process. By performing this process, it is possible to normally start the interrupt process that occurs thereafter, and to continue the process from the main loop after the interrupt process is executed.

When the above procedure is executed in the CPU initialization process, the main control CPU 72 transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 described below). As long as the power supply from the power control unit 162 is maintained, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the main loop from beginning to end.

Step S136, Step S138: The main control CPU 72 prohibits interruption and then executes the initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) the initial values of various software random numbers. In the present embodiment, various random numbers other than the jackpot determination random number (hardware random number) and the hit determination random number (hardware random number) corresponding to the normal symbol (for example, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern determination random number, etc.) Is generated on the program. These software random numbers are updated by the loop counter within a predetermined range in another timer interrupt process (step S212 in FIG. 13), but the initial values of the loop counter (all) are updated every time the random number value makes a round in this process. Random numbers do not have to be the target). The initial value update random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S138, the initial value update random number is updated. It should be noted that the reason why the step S138 is executed after the interrupt is prohibited in the step S136 is that the same process is executed in another timer interrupt process (step S210 in FIG. 13), so that it overlaps with this (conflict). ) To prevent. In the present embodiment, the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number circuit 75, and the update cycle thereof is faster (for example, several μs) than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Therefore, it is not necessary to update the initial values of the big hit determination random number and the hit determination random number. The timer interrupt process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S140: The main control CPU 72 executes the reception command management process. In this process, the data received from the payout control device 92 is analyzed, and the process is performed according to the result. If the received command is a payout start specification command, the main control CPU 72 outputs a payout start confirmation specification command to the payout command buffer, while if not, is the received data within a predetermined range (receive command)? If it is out of the range, the payout error specification command is output to the production command buffer, and the payout radio error flag is set according to the situation.

Step S142: The main control CPU 72 executes the effect command transmission process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 transmits each effect command output to the effect command buffer to the effect control device 124.

In the present embodiment, 9.0 seconds (2.5 seconds at the time of inspection) elapse from the power-on in consideration of the approximate time required for the processing executed when the power is turned on in the effect control device 124. We will wait and send the production command.

Step S144, Step S146: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this process are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, fluctuation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among the software random numbers. This process is performed with the remaining time when an interrupt request is generated during the execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes various interrupt processes. The content of the interrupt process will be described later using another flowchart.

[Evacuation processing when power is turned off]
Next, a process to be executed when a power cutoff (hereinafter, abbreviated as "power cutoff") occurs will be described. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the evacuation process when the power is turned off. In the main controller 70, the occurrence of power failure and the occurrence of reset are monitored by the same monitoring IC (for example, an IC mounted on a reset controller (not shown)). This monitoring IC monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power supply control unit 162, and outputs a power supply cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal of the parallel I / O port 79 when the voltage level falls below the reference voltage. The main control CPU 72 executes an evacuation process (XINT interrupt process, backup means) when the power is turned off, triggered by an input of a power cutoff warning signal to the XINT terminal (XINT interrupt). Hereinafter, each procedure of the evacuation process when the power is turned off will be described later.

Steps S150 and S152: The main control CPU 72 reads the power cutoff detection switch input port of the parallel I / O port 79, checks a specific bit, and confirms whether or not a power cutoff warning signal has been detected. If it cannot be confirmed that the power off warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 permits interruption, ends the power off save process, and ends the main loop of the CPU initialization process (FIGS. 9 to 10) (FIGS. 9 to 10). Returns to the program address indicated by the stack pointer). On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S154.

Step S154: The main control CPU 72 includes test signal terminals and command control in addition to output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first prize-winning port solenoid 90, the second prize-winning port solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region. Clear the output port buffer corresponding to the signal.

Step S156, Step S158: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents of the work area of the RAM 76 excluding the backup valid determination flag and the thumb check buffer in 1-byte units, and repeats the addition for the entire area until the addition is completed. ..
Step S160: When the calculation of the sum for the entire area is completed (step S158: Yes), the main control CPU 72 saves the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S162: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores a valid value in the backup valid determination flag area.
Step S164: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “00H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the prohibited area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.

Step S166: The main control CPU 72 sets a predetermined value for counting the number of checks of the power cutoff warning signal in the loop counter.
Step S168: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the power cutoff warning signal has been detected. The method of confirming the power off warning signal is the same as the method in step S150 described above. When it is confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the previous step S166 again. On the other hand, if it cannot be confirmed that the power cutoff warning signal has been detected (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S170.

Step S170: The main control CPU 72 subtracts 1 from the value of the loop counter.
Step S172: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the loop counter is “0”. If it cannot be confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S168. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the loop counter is "0" (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S174.
Step S174: The main control CPU 72 shifts from the power outage save process to the CPU initialization process (FIG. 9). At this time, since the RETI instruction is not executed before the transition to the CPU initialization process, the CPU initialization process can be started with other interrupts prohibited.

The processes of steps S166 to S172 described above are so-called standby processes (follow-up processes) executed in preparation for shutting off the power supply from the power supply control unit 162. If the power off warning signal is continuously detected, step S166 to step S168 are repeatedly executed, so that the loop counter does not become "0". Therefore, the standby state will be continued as long as the power supply is sustained. On the other hand, if the detection of the power off warning signal is temporary (for example, detection due to a momentary power failure or the like), steps S168 to S172 are repeatedly executed, and the loop counter is subtracted with the passage of time. Suddenly, when it becomes "0", the process shifts to the CPU initialization process. That is, the main control CPU 72 first calculates the checksum and saves the result before the power supply is completely cut off, and enters the standby state, and performs other processing in the situation where the power supply is being cut off. While the standby state is maintained without execution and the upcoming power supply is cut off in a safe state, the CPU is initialized in a situation where the stable power supply is restored after a temporary power failure occurs. Move to processing and restart main processing. By executing such a standby process, it is possible to guarantee a stable gaming operation of the main control device 70 and thus the pachinko machine 1.

When the power supply from the power supply control unit 162 is cut off, the power supply source to the main control device 70 is automatically switched to the backup power supply. Since the main control device 70 is supplied with backup power from a backup power supply circuit (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main control device 70) (for example, a circuit including a capacitance element mounted on the main control device 70) after a power failure occurs, the stored contents of the RAM 76 are stored. It is retained without disappearing even after the power is turned off. The backup power supply circuit may be built in, for example, the power supply control unit 162.

Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76, which is the backup target (sum addition target), is stored in the RAM 76 even after the power is turned off. Further, the retained memory is restored as backup information when a power failure occurs after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous CPU initialization process (FIG. 9).

[Command reception interrupt processing]
Next, a process to be executed when a command is received from the payout control device 92 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the command reception interrupt process. The payout control device 92 transmits a command for specifying the payout start to indicate that the payout of the game ball has started to the main control device 70, and various devices (for example, for example) related to payout of the prize ball as the game progresses. The command transmitted from the payout device board 100, the full tank switch 161 and the like) to the main control device 70 is relayed and transmitted. These commands transmitted by the payout control device 92 are received by the receive data register of the specific channel of the serial communication circuit 196 of the main control device 70. The main control CPU 72 executes the command reception interrupt process (SCU interrupt process) triggered by this command reception (SCU interrupt process). Hereinafter, each procedure of the command reception interrupt processing will be described step by step.

Step S180: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the A register (accumulator) and the F register (flag register) used during the execution of the main loop to the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of data reception interrupt processing.

Step S182: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks a specific bit of the status register to confirm whether or not there is data in the reception data register (reception FIFO). When it is confirmed that there is data in the received data register (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S184. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that there is data in the received data register (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S186.
Step S184: The main control CPU 72 stores the contents of the data register in the receive command buffer.

Steps S186 and S188: The main control CPU 72 restores the values of the A and F registers saved in step S180 to each register, permits interrupts, and then ends the command reception interrupt process to perform the CPU initialization process. Return to the main loop (FIG. 10).

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the timer interrupt process. The main control CPU 72 executes a timer interrupt process (PTC interrupt process) every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request (PTC interrupt) output by the timer circuit 194. Hereinafter, each procedure of the timer interrupt process will be described later.

Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the values of the AF register (accumulator / flag register pair), BC, DE, and HL register (general purpose register pair) used during the execution of the main loop into the save area of the RAM 76. Evacuate. Another value can be written to each register after the value is saved in the process of timer interrupt processing.

Step S202: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits interruption. If the interrupt is permitted here, another interrupt can be generated while the next step or later of the timer interrupt process is being executed. As described above, multiple interrupts are permitted for the timer interrupt process. The interrupt controller 192 executes the reception of the interrupt request signal, the priority control of multiple interrupts, and the like. The interrupt management by the interrupt controller 192 will be described later.

Step S204: The main control CPU 72 executes the dynamic port output process. In this process, in order to control the lighting of each lamp mounted on the integrated display board 89 by the dynamic lighting method, port output is performed in common units. More specifically, after clearing the output port, the main control CPU 72 stores the contents output to the common output request buffer corresponding to the selected common in the output port.

Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes the port input process. In this process, in order to accurately acquire the latest switch state based on the input port information, the main control CPU 72 is a logical product of the input values of various switch signals from the parallel I / O port 79 and the inversion result value of the previous input value. Is stored in the input port-on detection flag. As a result, it is possible to grasp the accurate input state based on the change from the previous time of various switch signals by the value (ON / OFF) of the input port on detection flag. Specific examples of the various switch signals include pass detection signals from the gate switch 78 and the probability variation region switch 95, a middle start winning opening switch 80, a right starting winning opening switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch. 85, a winning detection signal from the first winning opening switch 86, the second winning opening switch 81, and the like are included.

Step S208: The main control CPU 72 executes the timer update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and updates counters such as various timers for external information and timers for security signals, in addition to the timer for managing the game time and the closing time of the ordinary electric accessory.

Step S210: The main control CPU 72 also executes the initial value update random number update process. The content of the process is the same as that described in the process of the CPU initialization process (step S138 in FIG. 10).

Step S212: The main control CPU 72 executes the hit symbol random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery of special symbols and ordinary symbols. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76, and each loops within a specified range. The various random numbers include, for example, a jackpot symbol random number and the like.

Step S214: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous port input process (step S206), the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, the right starting winning opening switch 82, the first count switch 84, and the second count switch 85 , The event that occurred during the game is determined based on the winning detection signals from the first winning opening switch 86 and the second winning opening switch 81, and another process is executed according to the event that has occurred. The specific contents of the switch input event processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

In the present embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs an internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers (lottery) has occurred. Further, when the passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event that triggers a lottery corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. When it is determined that any of the events has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes processing according to each event. The process executed when the winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S215: The main control CPU 72 executes a setting change process (setting-related process). In this process, the process associated with changing or confirming the set value is executed. If the setting is not changed or the setting is confirmed, that is, the game is possible, the main control CPU 72 skips this step (without executing the setting change process) and instead calculates the base. Then, the process of displaying on the performance display monitor 200 can be executed. The main control CPU 72 determines the number of prize balls paid out when the game balls enter each winning opening (starting winning opening, normal winning opening, large winning opening), and the number of outs indicating the number of game balls fired into the game area. The base can be calculated by dividing by (the number of game balls detected by the out switch).

Further, when the setting change process (setting-related process) is executed in this step, the main control CPU 72 generates a setting-related end designation command. Here, the "setting-related end specification command" is an effect command that notifies that the processing related to the change or confirmation of the setting has been completed, and the setting-related end specification command includes information on the setting value in addition to this. Can be included. The generated setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 10) executed in the main loop.

Step S216, Step S218: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol game process and the normal symbol game process. These processes are for specifically advancing the game in the pachinko machine 1. Among them, in the special symbol game processing (step S216), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the first special symbol display device 34 and the first. 2. The variable display or stop display by the special symbol display device 35 is determined, and the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 is controlled according to the display result. The details of the special symbol game processing will be described later using a further flowchart.

Further, in the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the main control CPU 72 determines the variation display and the stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. To control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (a random number determined per normal symbol) acquired in the previous switch input event process (step S204) triggered by the passage of the start gate 20, and is in the normal symbol game process. Reads a random number value from the memory and determines whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol is fluctuated by the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hit mode, and then the main control CPU 72 presses the normal electric accessory solenoid 88. The variable start winning device 28 is activated by excitation (movable piece operating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a stop display of the normal symbol in an out-of-order manner after the fluctuation display.

Step S220: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the state management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 is recovered to an abnormal winning frequency (a state in which the number of balls entered into the middle starting winning opening 26 and the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is abnormally large) and a base abnormality (to the back side of the game board unit 8). The degree of risk such as the number of game balls, that is, the total number of winning balls in each winning opening 22, 24, 26, 28a, 30b, 31b is larger than the number of game balls driven into the game area 8a). Check if a high condition has occurred. When an abnormal state is detected, the main control CPU 72 causes an abnormality by outputting a security signal to the hall computer of the amusement park and by transmitting a predetermined effect control command to the effect control device 124. Notify that.

Step S222: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning opening switch process. In this process, when each input port on detection flag stored based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 80, 81, 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous port input process (step S206) is ON, The prize ball control counters for each target are added by 1 and updated.

Step S224: The main control CPU 72 executes the prize ball payout process. Although the detailed flow is not shown, in this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the payout command buffer is not empty (whether the payout command to be transmitted is set), and is not empty (the payout command is not empty). If it is set), various payout commands output to the payout command buffer are transmitted to the payout control device 92. For example, the payout command indicating the start mode when the power is turned on is set in the process of CPU initialization (step S118 and step S124 in FIG. 9) and output to the payout command buffer (step S126 in FIG. 9). However, a payout command indicating this activation mode is sent here. On the other hand, if the payout command buffer is empty, the process proceeds to the process for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the prize ball control counter is 0, and if the prize ball control counter is not 0, the payout control device 92 issues a prize ball designation payout command indicating the number of prize balls corresponding to this counter. Send to. More specifically, the prize ball designation payout command corresponding to each prize ball control counter updated in the previous step S222 is transmitted here. To transmit the payout command, the payout command permission signal is input from the payout control device 92 to the main control device 70, and the number of payout commands set in the transmission data register (transmission FIFA) is a predetermined number. When less than (more specifically, when the payout command set in the transmission FIFA in step S224 executed before the previous time has been transmitted, or when the transmission FIFA is currently being transmitted and there is space in the transmission FIFA. ) Is executed only.

Further, particularly in step S224 at the time of turning on the power, when the payout command set in the process of CPU initialization processing is normally transmitted, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch permission signal with this as an opportunity. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 clears the payout command buffer output when the power is turned on, and turns on the emission permission signal by setting a specific bit of the output port (specific output information setting means). As a result, the launch of the game ball is permitted after confirming the normal operation after the power is turned on, and the launch permission signal is sent to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, so that the game ball can be launched. It becomes a state.

Further, the main control CPU 72 outputs a prize ball content command for transmitting the content of the number of prize balls to the effect control device 124 in the prize ball payout process. When a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 corresponding to the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31, it corresponds to the first profit (for 15 game balls). Generate a prize ball content command. Further, when the winning detection signal is input from the second winning opening switch 81 corresponding to the normal winning opening 24, the prize ball content command corresponding to the second profit (for 10 game balls) is generated. The prize ball content command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the port output process (step S236) described later.

[About the number of prize balls and the number of game balls won]
The number of prize balls at the start port of the first special symbol and the number of prize balls at the start port of the second special symbol are set to a specified number of one or more, respectively. Further, the number of prize balls may be different between the starting port of the first special symbol and the starting port of the second special symbol. Furthermore, the minimum number of prize balls is set based on the winning probability of the special symbol and the expected value of the total number of game balls acquired (the average number of balls to be obtained in a series of periods from the first hit to the end of the time reduction state). You may. Furthermore, the winning probability of the special symbol, the expected value of the total number of game balls won, the number of opening of the big winning opening, the opening time of the big winning opening, the maximum number of winning of the big winning opening, the number of winning balls of the big winning opening are predetermined. If the conditions are met, a jackpot may be set in which the number of game balls acquired by one jackpot is less than 1/4 of the maximum number of acquired game balls.

Step S226: The main control CPU 72 executes the firing position designation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets the launch position designation flag to the previous launch position designation flag, and then clears the launch position designation flag. Then, the main control CPU 72 turns on the launch position designation flag if the variable winning device is operating or the time reduction function is operating, and the launch position designation flag and the previous launch position designation flag match. If not, a launch position specification command is generated. The generated firing position designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 10) executed in the main loop.

Step S228: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an external information signal (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol confirmation count information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the amusement park through the external terminal plate 160. Store in request buffer.

In the present embodiment, among various external information signals, for example, by outputting "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" as big hit information to the outside, an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to provide various jackpot information to a vessel or a hall computer (external information signal output means). That is, by outputting the jackpot information by dividing it into a plurality of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5", the jackpot type (winning type) can be aggregated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) from these combinations, or internally. Occurrence of small hits (hits where the condition device does not operate) that are not classified as "big hits" even if they recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) and the shortened state of the symbol fluctuation time. Can be aggregated and managed. In addition, based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each machine is currently hit. Or, it is possible to recognize whether or not the symbol fluctuation time is currently shortened for each machine. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (ON or OFF set) of "big hit 1" to "big hit 5" in detail.

Step S230: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 represents various internal states (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, launch position designation, big hit, probability fluctuation function operating, time shortening function operating). Generate test signals and store them in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main control device 70.

Step S232: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the display output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 has a normal symbol display device 33, a normal symbol operation storage lamp 33a, a first special symbol display device 34, a second special symbol display device 35, a first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a, and a second special symbol. Performs processing necessary for managing the lighting state of the working memory lamp 35a, the game status display device 38, and the like. Specifically, in a mode corresponding to the fluctuation display and stop display of the symbol determined in the special symbol game processing (step S216) and the normal symbol game processing (step S218), the operation memory number display, the game state display, and the like. The drive signal for lighting each lamp is stored as byte data in the port output request buffer for each common.

Here, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is sequentially stored in the output port one common at a time in the dynamic port output process (step S204) each time the timer interrupt process occurs. It is output. For example, in the timer interrupt process executed next time, the byte data stored for common 1 is output to the port, and in the timer interrupt process executed one after another, the byte data stored for common 2 is output to the port. , And so on, the byte data stored in the port output request buffer for each common is processed one by one in order. As a result, each lamp constituting a predetermined display mode (a mode in which a symbol variation display, a stop display, an operation memory number display, a game state display, etc.) is sequentially driven in a common unit, and lighting control is performed by a dynamic lighting method. Will be.

Step S234: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes the solenoid output management process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 drives each drive signal of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first special winning opening solenoid 90, the second special winning opening solenoid 97, and the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region stored in the port output request buffer. , Test signals, etc. are also stored in the port output request buffer.

Step S236: The main control CPU 72 executes the port output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether a value is stored in each output buffer (port output request buffer), and if the value is stored, outputs the port. For example, the drive signals of the solenoids 88, 90, 97, and 99 stored in the port output request buffer in the previous step S234 are output to the port. In this case, each drive signal is transmitted to the corresponding solenoids 88, 90, 97, 99, and each solenoid can be made to operate according to the drive signal.

In the present embodiment, an example in which the processes (game control program module) of steps S216 to S236 are executed as a part of the timer interrupt process is given, but these processes are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

Step S238: The control CPU 72 returns the values of the HL, DE, BC, and AF registers saved in step S200 to each register, ends the timer interrupt processing, and enters the main loop of the CPU initialization processing (FIG. 10). Return.

[Interrupt management by interrupt controller]
As described above, in the main control device 70, during the execution of the CPU initialization process (FIG. 9), which is the main control program, the parallel that is the source of the XINT interrupt (save process when the power is turned off (FIG. 11)). I / O port 79 output interrupt request), SCU interrupt (interrupt request output by the serial communication circuit 196 that is the source of the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 12)), PTC interrupt (timer interrupt) An interrupt request output by the timer circuit 194, which is the source of the interrupt process (FIG. 13), may occur. These interrupt requests are managed / controlled by the interrupt controller 192 mounted on the main controller 70. The interrupt controller 192 permits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt permission instruction (EI instruction) of the main control CPU 72, and prohibits the acceptance of the interrupt request by the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction), that is, so-called masqueradable interrupt. Is being controlled.

Since the XINT interrupt, the SCU interrupt, and the PTC interrupt are all generated based on independent factors that do not depend on each other, it is naturally possible that a plurality of interrupt requests occur at the same time. Therefore, the interrupt controller 192 controls each interrupt request according to a predetermined priority of the interrupt request in consideration of the importance of the interrupt process, the processing efficiency, and the like.

More specifically, the priority of interrupt request (interrupt processing) is defined in the interrupt vector table, the priority of XINT interrupt (retract processing when power is turned off) is the lowest, and SCU interrupt (command). The priority of reception interrupt processing) is set to the highest. By setting the interrupt vector table at the beginning of the CPU initialization process (step S102 in FIG. 9), the interrupt controller 192 can perform priority control of interrupt requests generated at subsequent timings. .. Actually, after the CPU initialization process transitions to the main loop (steps S136 to S146 in FIG. 10), from the time when the interrupt is permitted (step S144 in FIG. 10) until the interrupt is prohibited (FIG. 10). When any interrupt request occurs during step S136) in step 10, the interrupt controller 192 controls the received interrupt request based on the priority set in the interrupt vector table. For example, when XINT interrupt and PTC interrupt are received at the same time, the higher priority PTC interrupt (timer interrupt process) is processed first. While the timer interrupt process is being executed, the XINT interrupt is in the interrupt wait state, and after the timer interrupt process is completed, the power outage save process is executed.

Further, when the procedure example of each interrupt process is reconfirmed, in the power failure save process (FIG. 11) and the command reception interrupt process (FIG. 12), immediately before returning from each interrupt process (RETI instruction). The interrupt is permitted for the first time (immediately before executing) (step S152 in FIG. 11 and step S188 in FIG. 12), whereas in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), the interrupt is interrupted at the beginning of the interrupt process. Interrupts are allowed (step S202 in FIG. 13), after which the main steps are performed. That is, the interrupt controller 192 (main control CPU 72) prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the power-off save process and the command reception interrupt process, while the interrupt controller 192 prohibits the execution of multiple interrupts during the execution of the timer interrupt process. Allows execution of interrupts.

By controlling the interrupt request based on the priority in this way, the interrupt controller 192 enables execution of multiple interrupts in the main controller 70.

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the switch input event processing (step S214 in FIG. 13). Hereinafter, each procedure will be described step by step.

Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 to execute the first special symbol storage update process. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal has been input (a lottery trigger has occurred) from the right-starting winning opening switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 to execute the second special symbol storage update process. Similarly, the specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart. On the other hand, when there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 to execute the first large winning opening counting process. In the first big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the winning detection signal has been input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second major winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b to execute the second major winning opening counting process. In the second big winning opening counting process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

Step S22: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a passage detection signal has been input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 to execute the normal symbol storage update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol operation memories is less than the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit, acquires a random number per normal symbol. do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the number of normal symbol operation memories by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random number value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, if there is no input of the winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

Step S26: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the detection signal is input from the probability change area switch 95 corresponding to the probability change area provided inside the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 to execute the process when passing through the probability variation region. As the process when passing through the probability variation area, the main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag as the game state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state transition means, probability variation function operation means). , Advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). This probability fluctuation function activation flag is reset when the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (170 times) without obtaining a winning result after the end of the big hit game. Further, as a process at the time of passing through the probabilistic region, the main control CPU 72 generates a probabilistic region passing command. The probabilistic region passage command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 10) executed in the main loop. The main control CPU 72 may execute the probability variation region passage processing only within a specific effective time (for example, within the time during which the probability variation region solenoid 99 is operated during the jackpot game). On the other hand, when there is no input of the detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13).

[1st special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S30: Here, first, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. Here, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into eight sections (for example, 2 bytes each) commonly used in the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and each section contains a jackpot determined random number and a jackpot symbol. Random numbers can be stored one by one as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol reaches the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol operation memory number. The first special symbol operation storage number counter is stored in, for example, the operation storage number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the value of the counter added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 13).

Step S32: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (first lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The random number value is acquired by designating the pin address of the random number circuit 75. When the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address is specified twice for each byte at the upper and lower levels. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, it saves this as the jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of this random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, it saves this as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol at the transfer destination address.

Step S34: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number as random numbers related to the variation condition of the first special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (acquisition of variation pattern determination element). Means, element acquisition means). Similarly, the acquisition of these random number values is performed by designating the address of the random number counter area for fluctuation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, they save them at the transfer destination address.

Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (lottery element storage means). An order (for example, first to fourth) is set for the plurality of sections, and if all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, each random number is stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, each random number is stored in order from the second section. The random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. This determination is made in the present embodiment because the pre-reading effect is not performed for the ball entering during the big hit.

Step S37: In a case other than during the jackpot (step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the first special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the first special symbol acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judgment (so-called "look-ahead"). The specific contents of the processing will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S38: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the first special symbol". Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), here, by synthesizing the upper byte with the lower byte, for example, a command having a length of one word. Will be generated.

Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the first special symbol. Specifically, the one-word length obtained by adding the increased working memory number (for example, "01H" to "04H") to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BBH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. Generate a production command. At this time, for the lower byte, by setting the second digit to "0" by default, the value indicates that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". That is, if the lower byte is "01H", it means that the number of working memories this time is "01H" as a result of increasing by one from the number of working memories "00H" up to the previous time. Similarly, if the lower byte is "02H" to "04H", it is increased by one from the previous operation memory numbers "01H" to "03H", and as a result, the current operation memory number is "02H" to "04H". It means that it became "04H". The preceding value "BBH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S39: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in step S38, the operation memory increase effect command generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning sound control command to the effect control device 124. It is a thing.
Then, when the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 14). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described step by step.

Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter, and confirms whether or not the operation memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol operation storage number counter represents the number (number of sets) of the jackpot determination random number, the jackpot symbol random number, etc. stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 or later.

Step S41: The main control CPU 72 adds one second special symbol operation memory number (increments the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter). Similar to the previous step S31 (FIG. 15), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 13) based on the value of the counter added here. Will be.

Step S42: Then, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number circuit 75 (second lottery element acquisition means, lottery element acquisition means). The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S32 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires the jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method of acquiring the random number value is the same as that of step S33 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S44: Further, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number related to the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means, element acquisition). means). The acquisition of these random numbers is also performed in the same manner as in step S34 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and transfers these random numbers to an empty section in the area. To memorize as a set (lottery element storage means). The storage method is the same as in step S35 (FIG. 15) described above.

Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. Then, if it is not during the jackpot (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. On the contrary, if the jackpot is in progress (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this judgment is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball that also occurs during the big hit.

Step S46: When it is not during the jackpot (step S45a: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes the acquisition-time effect determination process for the second special symbol. In this process, the result of the internal lottery is determined in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol acquired in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, and the effect content is determined accordingly. It is for judging. The details of the specific processing will be described later.

Step S47: After returning from the acquisition-time effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 then sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is "for special figure destination determination effect regarding the second special symbol". Similarly, in this case as well, the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S46), so here, for example, one word is combined with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command when the number of operating memories increases with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word length production command in which the number of operating memories after the increase (for example, "01H" to "04H") is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the type of the command. To generate. Similarly, for the second special symbol, by setting the second digit of the lower byte to "0" by default, it is possible to indicate that the value is "the result (change information) due to the increase in the number of working memories". can. The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S49: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output setting process with respect to the second special symbol. As a result, preparations are made for transmitting the special symbol destination determination effect command, the operation memory number increase effect command, the start opening winning sound control command, and the like to the effect control device 124 with respect to the second special symbol.
Then, when the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 14).

[Production judgment processing at the time of acquisition]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 executes this acquisition-time effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 15 and step S46 in FIG. 16) (preliminary determination). means). As described above, this process is executed for each of the first special symbol (when the ball enters the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when the ball enters the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to the process related to the first special symbol or the process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the content of the process will be described according to each procedure.

Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower bytes (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (first determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value (at the time of deviation) of the command.

Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random number value. The random number to be loaded here is stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). ..

Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the hit value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determination means, advance determination means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is predetermined according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects prior determination information regarding the fluctuation time (or fluctuation pattern number) when the "time reduction function" is activated. For example, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "out-of-reach variation (non-reduction variation time)" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Determine if it exists. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium non-shortening fluctuation time". In the case of reach variation, the "reach group (type of reach)" may also be determined from the reach mode random number, and the variation pattern destination determination command may be generated from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "out-of-reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "time reduction / medium reduction fluctuation time". Alternatively, if the current state is when the "time reduction function" is not operating (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the "normally out-of-reach fluctuation" based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to the "normally out of reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normally out of reach fluctuation time". On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the "normal deviation reach fluctuation", the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the "normal deviation fluctuation time". Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49). In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a variation pattern destination determination command for the variation pattern at the time of a small hit in the same manner as the above-described processing at the time of loss.

When the above procedure is executed, the main control CPU 72 ends the acquisition-time effect determination process and returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16). On the other hand, in the determination in step S54 above, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

Step S56: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the pre-determination result is set when the winning value is among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not been started yet. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this is "a symbol that can pass through the probability variation area (12 rounds, any probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol). ) ”, For example,“ A0H ”is set in the probability state schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a high probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with this random number corresponds to the "non-probability (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, "01H" is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting a normal (low) probability state as a schedule in the preliminary determination (pre-reading determination) of the jackpot determination random number acquired after the jackpot determination random number. If the winning value does not yet exist in the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. In addition, although an example in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the "probability state schedule flag" is given here, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, this step S56 and subsequent steps. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76 and the like may be omitted.

If the probability state schedule flag is not yet set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S66.

Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 then sets the low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register. The low-probability comparison value is also predetermined according to the low-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (during probability change), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is high probability (during probability change), the value "01H" is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low probability (normal), the value of the state flag is reset ("00H"). ").

Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high probability (No). ), Then step S64 is executed.

Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in step S66 above is rewritten. The high-probability comparison value is predetermined according to the high-probability winning probability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result has not been set yet and the current internal state has a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the range of the winning value (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Then, the main control CPU 72 similarly determines from the value of the flag register whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0), and as a result, if the loaded random number is out of the range of the hit value (Yes). ), The main control CPU 72 executes the deviation pattern information pre-determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the hit value but within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the jackpot type (winning type) at that time based on the jackpot symbol random number that is paired with the jackpot determination random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random numbers for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 16). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54, and from the result, whether the jackpot type corresponds to "probability variation area passable symbol (12 round normal symbol)" or "probability variation region passable symbol". To determine. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents a “probability variation region passage difficult symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents "probability variation region passable symbol", the main control CPU 72 sets the value "A0H" in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the next and subsequent processes, it is determined that "flag set has been completed" in step S56.

Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as a lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. For the special symbol destination determination value, for example, "01H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which is difficult to pass through a probabilistic region", and "A0H" is set when it corresponds to "a symbol which can pass through a probabilistic region". In any case, by setting the data for the lower byte here, the standard lower byte data "00H" set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern information pre-determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern destination determination command for the fluctuation time at the time of a big hit. The fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here reflects, for example, prior determination information regarding the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of a big hit. Further, the fluctuation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49).

The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag is set based on the first determination result (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the pre-hit determination is performed only by the current probability state, it is not necessary to execute the following steps S56, S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S58.

Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets the comparison value for low probability (normal time) in the A register.

Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting the probability state in a planned manner in the subsequent subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding earlier determination result, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the probability state based on the previous judgment result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), "A0H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag, and conversely, the probability state based on the previous judgment result is set. If is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), "01H" is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

Step S62: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and as a result, if it represents a high-probability schedule (). No), then step S64 is executed, and the comparison value for high probability is set.

In this way, if the probability state schedule flag based on the first determination result is already set and the value is for a high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for the high probability time, and then the next step S72 or later. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule but represents a normal (low) probability schedule (Yes), the main control CPU 72 steps. S64 is skipped and the next step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. As a result, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination in advance can be performed in consideration of the subsequent changes in the internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the first determination result. ..

When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 15) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 16).

[Special symbol game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game processing. The special symbol game processing includes execution selection processing (step S1000), special symbol fluctuation pre-processing (step S2000), special symbol fluctuation processing (step S3000), special symbol stop display processing (step S4000), and variable winning device at the time of big hit. The configuration includes a group of subroutines (program modules) for the management process (step S5000) and the small hit variable winning device management process (step S6000). Here, first, the basic flow of the special symbol game processing will be described along with each processing.

Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S2000 to S5000) from the “jump table”. For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process in the stack pointer as the return destination address.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started the variation display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation preprocessing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol change preprocessing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol is changing. If the processing is completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the processing during display of special symbol stop display (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In the present embodiment, the jump destination address is specified in the "jump table" to select the process, but apart from such a selection method, a "process flag", a "process selection flag", or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects the process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU performs each process as a whole, and in the first step thereof, the flag is referred to one by one for conditional branching (continuation / return). However, in the selection method of the present embodiment, the main control is performed. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

Step S2000: In the special symbol variation preprocessing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S3000: In the special symbol changing process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the fluctuation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (No. 0 to No. 7) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, thereby displaying the variation of the special symbol.

Step S4000: In the process during special symbol stop display, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Here as well, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED, but the pattern of the drive signal is constant, and a stop display of a special symbol is performed.

Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot mode in the previous special symbol stop display processing. When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of a big hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the big hit gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous for the player). During the jackpot game, the jump destination is set in the jackpot variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the jackpot variable winning device management process, until the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 counts the number of balls entered for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 10 game balls). ), It is excited over a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 16 times), whereby the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 open and close in a predetermined pattern. During this period, by intensively winning the game balls to the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31, the player is given an opportunity to collectively win a large number of prize balls (special game). Execution means). It should be noted that the opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit in this way is referred to as a "round", and if the number of continuous operations is 16 times in total, these are referred to as "16 rounds". May be generically referred to.

In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed from the first round to the fifth round, and the seventh to 16th rounds, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed in the sixth round. ing.

Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big hit variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round Alternatively, the value of the round number counter is incremented by 1 each time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command indicating the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 10). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the jackpot game (major role) only for that round.

Then, when the big hit game is finished, the main control CPU 72 changes the state (high probability state, time shortened state) after the big hit game is finished based on the game state flag (probability fluctuation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means). In the "high probability state", the probability fluctuation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about 10 times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the "time reduction state", the time reduction function is activated, the operation lottery of the normal symbol is highly probable, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is extended. The number of times of opening increases (so-called electric chew support is performed). Regarding the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state", there are cases where the state shifts to only one of them in terms of control, and there are cases where the state shifts according to both of them.

Step S6000: The variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode in the previous process during the special symbol stop display. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of small hit, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the small hit game state. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the variable display of the special symbol is not performed. In the small hit game, although the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) in a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), most of the winnings in the first big winning opening occur. do not.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, the following winning types are provided as a plurality of winning types.
(1) "6 round probability variation jackpot 1"
(2) "6 round probability variation jackpot 2"
(3) "12 rounds probability variation jackpot 1 (actually 4 rounds)"
(4) "12 rounds probability variation jackpot 2 (actually 9 rounds)"
(5) "12 rounds normal jackpot (actually 9 rounds)"
(6) "16 round probability change jackpot"
In this embodiment, big hits other than 6 rounds, 12 rounds, and 16 rounds may be provided.

The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, "6 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "6 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, "12 round probability variation jackpot 1" corresponds to the jackpot of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", and "12 round probability variation jackpot 2" corresponds to the jackpot of "12 round probability variation symbol 2". Further, the "12-round normal jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "12-round normal symbol", and the "16-round probability variation jackpot" corresponds to the jackpot of the "16-round probability variation symbol". Therefore, in the following, the "winning type" will be appropriately referred to as the "winning symbol".

[Opening operation pattern of variable winning device]
FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an opening operation pattern of the variable winning device. The contents of the opening of the large winning opening and the probability variation area corresponding to each winning symbol will be explained.

[6 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "6 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[6 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "6 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Therefore, in the jackpot game of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 6 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "sixth round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "6th round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the 6th round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". The difference between "6 round probability variation symbol 1" and "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is the difference in the number of time reductions given (details will be described later).

[12 round probability variation symbol 1]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round probability variation symbol 1" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first round and the second round, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the first and second rounds in the case of corresponding to the "12-round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial ball output (prize ball). Further, in the third to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Further, in the 7th to 12th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 7th to 12th rounds in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", the player is not given a substantial ball output (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", the player is substantially given 4 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 1", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 1", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 1", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[12 round probability variation symbol 2]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round probability variation symbol 2" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Further, in the 7th to 9th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 10th to 12th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 10th to 12th rounds in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 2", the player is not given a substantial payout (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the player is substantially given 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "12th round probability variation symbol 2", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 2", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the jackpot game ends. By activating the "time reduction function" later, the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

[12 round normal design]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "12 round normal symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Further, in the 7th to 10th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the 10th and 11th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is short-opened (for example, opened for 0.1 seconds). Therefore, in the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of falling under the "12th round normal symbol", the player is not given a substantial payout (prize ball). Therefore, in the big hit game of "12 rounds normal symbol", the player is substantially given 9 rounds worth of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round when the "12th round normal symbol" is applied, it is difficult (impossible) for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region because the second big winning opening is short-opened. Therefore, the "probability fluctuation function" is not activated after the jackpot game is completed, and the player is not given the privilege of shifting to the "high probability state".

In addition, in the case of "12 round normal symbol", even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, the "time reduction function" is activated after the jackpot game is completed. , The privilege to shift to the "time reduction state" is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation pattern]
When the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of "16 round probability variation symbol" in the process during the special symbol stop display, an opportunity occurs to shift from the normal state up to that point to the jackpot game state (special game execution means). In this case, in the first to fifth rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). Further, in the sixth round, the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time (for example, opened for 29.0 seconds). Further, in the 7th to 16th rounds, the first large winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is opened for a long time (for example, 29.0 seconds open). For this reason, the jackpot game of the "16-round probability variation symbol" substantially gives the player 16 rounds of balls (prize balls).

Here, in the sixth round in the case of corresponding to the "16 round probability variation symbol", since the second big winning opening is opened for a long time, the game ball may pass through the probability variation area. Therefore, in the case of corresponding to the "16 round probability variation symbol", when the game ball passes through the probability variation area arranged inside the second variable winning device 31 in the sixth round, after the jackpot game is completed, " The "probability fluctuation function" is activated, and the player is given a privilege to shift to the "high probability state".

Furthermore, in the case of the "16 round probability variation symbol", regardless of whether or not the probability variation area has passed, even if the "time reduction function" is not activated in the previous game, after the jackpot game is completed. By activating the "time reduction function", the player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state".

Here, the first major winning opening of the first variable winning device 30 is closed without waiting for the lapse of the longest opening time when a specified number of winnings (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) occur in one round. Will be done. Similarly, when the second large winning opening of the second variable winning device 31 wins a specified number of times (for example, 10 times = 10 game balls) in one round, the longest opening time does not have to wait. It will be closed.

In any case, if the winning symbol corresponds to "any of the probabilistic symbols other than the 12-round normal symbol" and the game ball passes through the probabilistic region during the jackpot game, the internal state is "high probability" after the jackpot game ends. The player is given the privilege of shifting to the "time reduction state". On the other hand, if the winning symbol corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, so the internal state shifts to the "low probability time shortened state" after the jackpot game ends. do. Even if the winning symbol corresponds to "a probability variation symbol other than the 12-round normal symbol", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game, the internal state is "low probability time" after the jackpot game ends. Move to "shortened state".

Further, in the operation pattern shown in this table, the interval time between rounds is a common "1.5 seconds". The inter-round interval time is a waiting time set between rounds.

[Small hit]
Further, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a winning type other than the non-winning. When the small hit is won, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes (special game execution means). That is, in the above processing during the special symbol stop display, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small hit mode, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 operates) in the low probability state or the high probability state. The game to be played) is executed. In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but the winning of the first large winning opening is hardly generated. In addition, even if the small hit game is completed, the "probability fluctuation function" does not operate and the "time reduction function" does not operate, so that the "high probability state" or "time reduction state" is reached. No transfer benefits will be granted (it is not a prerequisite for this). Also, even if you win a small hit in the "high probability state", the "high probability state" does not end after the end of the small hit game, and even if you win the small hit in the "time reduction state", the small hit The "time reduction state" does not end after the winning game ends (except when the maximum number of times is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification is such that a small hit is set, but it is also possible to use a game specification in which a small hit is not set.

[Special symbol change pre-processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol change preprocessing. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the first special symbol operation memory number or the second special symbol operation memory number remains (is greater than 0). This confirmation can be performed by referring to the value of the working memory counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the demo setting process of step S2500.

Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demo effect command. The demo effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 10). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (the same applies thereafter).

On the other hand, if the value of the working memory counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2200.

Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads the random numbers in order from the first section, erases (consumes) them, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ). The read random number is stored in another temporary storage area, for example. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads out the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for the internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol. It should be noted that the program may simply read out random numbers in the order in which they are stored, without setting priorities for each special symbol. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts and subtracts one value of the working memory counter (the first special symbol or the second special symbol that shifts the random number) stored in the RAM 76. The latter value is set to "the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation". As a result, in the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 13), the display mode of the number of stored numbers by the first special symbol operation storage lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation storage lamp 35a is changed (decreased by 1). After completing the steps up to this point, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of jackpot values, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). The jackpot value range set at this time differs between the low-probability state and the high-probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated), and in the high-probability state, the jackpot value range is expanded by about 10 times compared to the low-probability state. NS. Further, the range of the jackpot value differs depending on the current set value, and the range of the jackpot value is set wider in the case of the high setting than in the case of the low setting. In this way, the special symbol lottery (predetermined lottery) is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the current set value. Then, if the random number value read at this time is included in the range of the jackpot value, the main control CPU 72 sets the jackpot flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

When the jackpot flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 next sets a range of small hit values in the same jackpot determination process, and determines whether or not the read random value is included in this range (design lottery execution means). ). The "small hit" here is something other than non-winning (missing), but has a different property from the "big hit". That is, the "big hit" generates an opportunity (a turning point of the game) to shift to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", but the "small hit" does not generate such an opportunity. However, the "small hit" is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in the "big hit". The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different or the same between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability fluctuation function is activated). In any case, if the read random number value is included in the small hit value range, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, but the big hit judgment table and the small hit judgment table for each state are prepared in advance. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random number value.

Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the jackpot flag in the previous jackpot determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2402.

Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) has been set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the small hit flag is not set to the value (01H) (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine a big hit (for example, 01H is set) or a small hit (for example, 0AH is set) based on the value of the common hit flag without preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag separately.

Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes a stop symbol determination process at the time of disconnection. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of loss) for transmission to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 10).

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always one segment (center). Only the lighting display of the bar "-") can be set, and the stop symbol number data can be fixed to one value (for example, 64H). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load of the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern number at the time of disconnection for the special symbol (variation pattern selection means). The fluctuation pattern number distinguishes the type (pattern) of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, and corresponds to the fluctuation time required for the fluctuation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection differs depending on whether or not it is in the "time reduction state", the main control CPU 72 loads the game state flag in this process, and whether the current state is the "time reduction state". Check if it is not. In the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is basically set to the shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) except when the reach fluctuation is performed (reduced fluctuation time determining means). ). Further, even if it is not in the "time shortened state", the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is based on, for example, the "number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)" set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation is performed. It may be shortened (for example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 0 → about 12.5 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is about 1 → about 8 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 2 → 5). About seconds, the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation display is 3 → about 2.5 seconds). It should be noted that the stop display time of the symbol at the time of detachment is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the fluctuation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

In the present embodiment, when a non-winning result is obtained as a result of the internal lottery, control is performed such that, for example, a "reach effect" is generated and the result is lost, or a "reach effect" is not generated and the player is lost. It is said. Then, in the "difference pattern selection table at the time of loss", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects, for example, "non-reach effect" and "reach effect", are defined in advance. One of the fluctuation patterns will be selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, a super reach production, and a story reach production.

[Example of variation pattern selection table at the time of loss]
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of disconnection.
This selection table is a table used at the time of loss (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "1" to "8" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "1" to "3" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without the reach effect being performed, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "8" are the fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reach. It corresponds. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "4" to "6" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of order after the normal reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "7" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are out of alignment after the super reach. The fluctuation pattern number “8” corresponds to a fluctuation pattern that is out of alignment after story reach. The fluctuation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of working memories at the start of fluctuation, the internal state (low probability state or high probability state, non-time reduction state or time reduction state), and the winning symbol (hereinafter,). Similarly).

Here, the length of the set fluctuation time differs greatly between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the "non-reach fluctuation pattern" basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the "reach fluctuation pattern" is It corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) that is more than twice that.

Then, the main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the "comparison value" in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the comparison value is used. Select the corresponding variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change preprocessing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the jackpot determination result is missed (when other than non-winning), but when the determination result is a jackpot (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). , The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of a big hit will be described.

Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type determining means). Therefore, the main control CPU 72 can refer to the jackpot stop symbol selection table in the jackpot stop symbol determination process and determine the type of the winning symbol based on the jackpot symbol random number from the stored contents.

[Winning symbol at the time of big hit]
In this embodiment, six types of winning symbols are roughly divided as winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The breakdown of the 6 types is "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 2", "12 round probability variation symbol 1", "12 round probability variation symbol 2", "12 round normal symbol", "16 round probability variation symbol". ". In addition, each winning symbol may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, in the case of "6 round probability variation symbol 1", "6 round probability variation symbol 1a", "6 round probability variation symbol 1b", "6 round probability variation symbol 1c", and so on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbols selected at the time of the big hit of the internal lottery corresponding to each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. Therefore, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the jackpot this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution values for each winning symbol, and each distribution value "40", "10", "50" has the denominator as 100. Corresponds to the proportion of cases. In the second column from the left, "12 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)", "12 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 9 rounds)", and "12 round normal symbol (substantially 9 rounds)" corresponding to each distribution value. (Actually 9 rounds) ”is shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting "12 round probability variation symbol 1 (substantially 4 rounds)" is 40/100 (= 40%), and "12 round probability variation symbol 2 (substantially 4 rounds)". The percentage of "9 rounds" selected is 10/100 (= 10%), and the percentage of "12 rounds normal jackpot (actually 9 rounds)" selected is 50/100 (= 50%). .. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using the jackpot symbol random number.

In any case, when the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. Selectively determine the winning symbol with. Further, in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value and EVENT value. Among them, the MODE value "B1H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the jackpot of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the result of this big hit corresponds to the first special symbol and "12 round probability variation symbol 1" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described by "B1H01H". Will be.

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the stop symbol selection table at the time of the first special symbol jackpot, the main control CPU 72 generates the stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
The value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown in the second column from the right of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is given 170 times.
On the other hand, in the case of the "12 round normal symbol", since it is difficult for the game ball to pass through the probability variation region during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given. In addition, although it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation number is not given.

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or "12 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time saving number of times is given 170 times.
On the other hand, if it corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", the number of time reductions is 100 times.
If the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, although it corresponds to the "12 round probability variation symbol 1" or the "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the number of time reductions is 100 times.

[Second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. When the result of the current jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means).

In the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the distribution values for each winning symbol are also shown in the left column, and each distribution value "60", "20", "20" has a denominator of 100. Corresponds to the ratio in the case of. Similarly, in the second column from the left, "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and "6 round probability variation symbol 2" corresponding to the distribution value are shown. That is, at the time of a big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting "16 round probability variation symbol" is 60/100 (= 60%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 1". Is 20/100 (= 20%), and the ratio of selecting "6 round probability variation symbol 2" is 20/100 (= 20%).

When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol by the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table. To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Here, too, the stop symbol command is described by a combination of MODE value and EVENT value, and among them, the MODE value "B2H" of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the second special symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values "01H", "02H", and "03H" of the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table, respectively. Therefore, for example, if the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol and "16 round probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described by "B2H01H". ..

As described above, when the main control CPU 72 selects the winning symbol from the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 determines the jackpot stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Probability change count]
In the second column from the right of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the probability variation number (ST number) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of probability variation is 170 times. Granted. In addition, although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the probability variation count is not given. ..

[Time saving number]
In the right column of the second special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table, the value of the time reduction number (limit number of times) given after the end of the jackpot game is shown.
In the present embodiment, it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol" or "6 round probability variation symbol 1", and when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the time saving number of times is given 170 times.
On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region during the big hit game, which corresponds to the "6 round probability variation symbol 2", the time reduction number of times is given 100 times.
In addition, although it corresponds to "16 round probability variation symbol", "6 round probability variation symbol 1" or "6 round probability variation symbol 2", if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the big hit game, the number of time reductions is 100 times. Granted.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. Generally, in the case of jackpot reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is hit as a result of the internal lottery, for example, a "reach effect" is generated in the production to control the big hit. Then, in the "big hit fluctuation pattern selection table", fluctuation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of "reach effects" are defined, and when a jackpot is hit, one of the fluctuation patterns is selected from among them. It will be.
Here, the reach production includes various reach productions such as a normal reach production, a long reach production, and a super reach production. Further, at the time of winning in the state where the time reduction function is activated, even if the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time (the fluctuation pattern without the reach effect) is selected without selecting the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time. good.

[Example of jackpot fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot variation pattern selection table.
This selection table is a table used at the time of a big hit (variation pattern defining means). Further, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, a "comparison value" and a "variation pattern number" are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the start address. The "comparison value" includes, for example, eight stepwise different values "101", "201", "211", "221", "231", "241", "251", and "255 (FFH)". It is provided, and "61" to "68" of "variation pattern number" are assigned to each "comparison value".

The fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "68" all correspond to fluctuation patterns that are hit by the reach effect. Of these, the fluctuation pattern numbers "61" to "64" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the story reach, and the fluctuation pattern numbers "65" and "66" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that hit after the super reach. Corresponding, the fluctuation pattern numbers "67" and "68" correspond to the fluctuation patterns that are hit after the normal reach. In addition, at the time of winning in the state of high probability time shortening, the fluctuation pattern that becomes a hit may be set without executing the reach effect.

The main control CPU 72 compares the acquired fluctuation pattern determination random number value with the “comparison value” in the above fluctuation pattern selection table in order, and if the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, it corresponds to the comparison value. Select the variation pattern number (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the fluctuation pattern determination random value at that time is "190", the main control CPU 72 has the next comparison value "101" because the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value "101". 201 ”and the random value are compared. In this case, since the random number value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Fig. 20: Special symbol change preprocessing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a big hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) as the game state flag regardless of the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410. ) Is set in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state transition means, time reduction function operating means, advantageous game state transition means, special state transition means).

Further, in the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the jackpot stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of a big hit) together with a stop symbol command (at the time of a big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Next, the processing at the time of a small hit will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of a small hit (stop symbol number at the time of a small hit) based on the random number of the big hit symbol. Here as well, the relationship between the big hit symbol random value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit is defined in advance in the special symbol selection table at the time of small hit (winning type defining means). In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hit is determined by using the big hit symbol random number in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning symbol at the time of small hit]
In the present embodiment, there is only one type of winning symbol at the time of small hit, "one-time open small hit symbol". However, in addition to this, another type such as "double open small hit symbol" or "three open small hit symbol" may be prepared. The "small hit" as a result of the internal lottery does not trigger the subsequent state to change to the "high probability state" or the "time reduction state", so the "2 rounds (2)" that are essential for this type of pachinko machine It is possible to provide a "single opening small hit symbol" without being bound by the provisions of "more than once opening).

Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit time variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number shifted in the previous step S2200 (variation pattern selection means). ). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined value of the fluctuation time in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach fluctuation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or the fluctuation pattern equivalent to that in the case of a normal fluctuation can be selected.

Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes other setting processing at the time of a small hit. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the small hit stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the special symbol variation start process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the variation pattern data based on the variation pattern number (at the time of loss / at the time of hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets the fluctuation start flag of the special symbol in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This fluctuation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 18: Processing during special symbol change, processing during special symbol stop display]
In the special symbol change processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the change timer from the register into the timer counter, and then sets the value of the timer counter according to the passage of time (the count number of clock pulses or the value of the interrupt counter). Decrement. Then, the main control CPU 72 controls the variation display of the special symbol until the value becomes 0 while referring to the value of the timer counter. Then, when the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display process (step S4000) as the next jump destination, and generates a confirmation command. Here, the "confirmation command" is a command indicating that the special symbol has stopped. The confirmation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process (step S142 in FIG. 10) executed in the main loop.

Further, in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 controls the stop display of the special symbol based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (step S2404, step S2407, step S2410 in FIG. 20). Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. When the stopped symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display processing, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol storage area shift processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol change preprocessing, when the value of the operation storage counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is larger than "0" (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 20), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the oldest existing working memory corresponds to the first special symbol. That is, if the storage area of the RAM 76 is accessed and the oldest working memory among them does not correspond to the first special symbol but corresponds to the second special symbol (No), the main control CPU 72 next The process proceeds to step S2212.

Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates a second special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting "02H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2214: On the other hand, when the oldest working memory corresponds to the first special symbol (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 designates the first special symbol as the special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. .. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting "01H" as the target symbol designation value.

Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 with respect to the target special symbol specified in either step S2212 or step S2214. The specific contents of the processing are as described in the previous special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the working memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target for shifting the storage area this time is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the “number of working memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the working memory counter after subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the "working memory number at the start of fluctuation" may be set after adding the values of the working memory counters.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the special symbol to be shifted the storage area this time is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word length command, but its configuration is in contrast to the above-mentioned "effect command when the number of working memories is increased". That is, the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is the value of the lower byte (for example, "00H" to "03H") indicating the number of working memories after the reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, "BCH") of the upper byte indicating the command type. ”) Is added, and the value of the lower byte is further added (logical sum) with an additional value (for example,“ 10H ”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories due to consumption”. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second digit becomes "1" by ORing the added value "10H", and this value indicates that it is the "result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories". It becomes a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is "13H", it means that the number of working memories "4" (command notation is "14H") up to the previous time is reduced by one, and as a result, the number of working memories this time is "3" (command). The notation indicates that it has become "13H"). Similarly, if the lower byte is "12H" to "10H", it is the result of one decrease in the number of working memories "3" to "1" (command notation is "13H" to "11H") up to the previous time. , It means that the number of working memories this time is "2" to "0" (command notation is "12H" to "10H"). The preceding value "BCH" is a value indicating that the effect command this time is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

Step S2226: When the target of this time is the first special symbol (step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets the operation memory number reduction effect command for the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, "BBH") indicating that it is a working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes the effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the operation memory number reduction effect command set in step S2224 or step S2226 to the effect control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol change preprocessing (FIG. 20).

[Processing during special symbol stop display]
Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for processing during special symbol stop display. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt cycle).

Step S4200: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has expired based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the next interrupt cycle, and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display processing.

On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4250.

Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a stop display time end command. The stop display time end command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The "stop display time end command" is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set. When the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4350.

[At the time of winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to the "big hit variable winning device management process". The main control CPU 72 executes a process of setting various functions to be inactive in this process. Specifically, the probability fluctuation function is deactivated and the time saving function is deactivated. As a result, before the special game (major role) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time reduction state.

Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "start of big win (during big hit game)" as an internal state flag on control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of the jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 round probability variation symbol", the value corresponding to "16 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol", a value representing "12 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a value representing "6 rounds" is set in the continuous operation count status. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress. The state command indicating that the jackpot is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4500: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type (stop symbol number) of the jackpot symbol determined in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "16 rounds probability variation symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "16 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "12 rounds". Further, when the type of the jackpot symbol is "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the continuous operation count command is generated as a value representing "6 rounds". The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

When the above procedure is completed at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed except at the time of big hit.
That is, when the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the jackpot flag (01H) is not set (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4600.

Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next confirms whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. Then, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and it is simply out of alignment (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4602.

Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the address of the special symbol change preprocessing as the jump destination address of the jump table.

Step S4605: On the other hand, when the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the address of the small hit variable winning device management process as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets "small hit start (small hit in progress)" as an internal state flag on the control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a state command indicating that a small hit is in progress. The state command indicating that the small hit is in progress is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the number-cutting counter. In the "count cut counter", the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the "high probability state" and the "time reduction state", respectively. In the present embodiment, since the so-called number-cutting probability change function is adopted, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state", the number-cutting counter for the high-probability state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times). The number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 170 times or 100 times). Further, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number cut counter for the high probability state is not set, and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times).

Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded counter value is 0. At this time, if the number-of-count counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the number-of-times-cutting counter value is not 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S4630 after generating the number-of-times-cutting counter value command.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (1 subtracts) the number-of-times counter value.
Step S4640: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not 0. As a result of the subtraction, if the value of the number-of-times cutting counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game processing. On the other hand, when the value of the number-cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets the flag when the number-cutting function is activated. In the present embodiment, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to "any one of the probability variation symbols other than the 6-round probability variation symbol 2", the number-cut counter for the high probability state and the time reduction state is a predetermined numerical value. Since it is set to (for example, 170 times), it is the probability fluctuation function operation flag and the time reduction function operation flag that are reset.

Further, when shifting to the "high probability time shortening state" corresponding to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2, the number cut counter for the high probability state is set to a predetermined numerical value (for example, 170 times), and the number cut counter for the time reduction state is set. Is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times). Therefore, it is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset when the 100th variation ends, and the probability variation function activation flag that is reset when the 170th variation ends (advantageous game state transition means). , Special state transition means).

Furthermore, when shifting to the "low probability time reduction state", the number-of-times counter for the time reduction state is set to a predetermined value (for example, 100 times), so that only the time reduction function activation flag is reset. be. As a result, the time reduction state and the high probability state end after the stop display of the special symbol. After completing the above procedure, the process returns to the special symbol game processing.

[Display output management process]
Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S232 in FIG. 13) executed in the timer interrupt process. The display output management process includes special symbol display setting process (step S1200), normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), status display setting process (step S1220), working memory display setting process (step S1230), and continuous operation count display setting. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S1240).

Of these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the working memory display setting process (step S1230) are described in the first special symbol display device 34 and the second. Generates and outputs a drive signal applied to each LED of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a. It is a process to be done.

The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal applied to each LED of the game state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d and the time saving state display lamp 38e according to the values of the probability fluctuation function operation flag or the time reduction function operation flag, respectively. For example, if a value (01H) is set in the probability fluctuation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d. The probability fluctuation state display lamp 38d keeps lighting until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started, or until the probability fluctuation function is turned off after the fluctuation display of the special symbol is performed a specified number of times, and then the lamp is not lit. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the time reduction status display lamp 38e, regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the firing position designation lamp 38f according to the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated by the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f. .. If the time reduction function operation flag is set to a value (01H), the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the firing position designation lamp 38f in addition to the time saving status display lamp 38e. .. When the launch position designation lamp 38f shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot game, it lights up from the start of the jackpot game until the "time reduction state" ends, and does not light up when the "time reduction state" ends. OFF).

Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the jackpot type display lamps 38a, 38b, 38c in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for any of the jackpot type indicator lamps 38a, 38b, and 38c based on the value of the continuous operation count status. At this time, the target for outputting the lighting signal is any of the indicator lamps 38a, 38b, 38c corresponding to the jackpot symbol specified by the value of the continuous operation count status. For example, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "16 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38c representing "16 rounds (16R)". If the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "12 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b indicating "12 rounds (12R)". Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies "6 rounds", the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38a indicating "6 rounds (6R)".

[Variable winning device management process at the time of big hit]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a big hit. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100), the jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5200), the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and the jackpot jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300). The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the winning opening closing process (step S5400) and the jackpot end processing (step S5500).

Step S5100: In the jackpot game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S5200 to step S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the jackpot variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not yet started, the main control CPU 72 sets the big winning opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the jackpot opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the jackpot opening / closing operation process (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and opens / closes the jackpot opening / closing. If the operation process is completed, the big hit opening closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the jackpot opening / closing operation processing and the jackpot closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (the number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot end processing (the next jump destination). Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process at the time of big hit]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a big hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened and closed at the time of a big hit and the opening time of each. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a symbol-specific open pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening (the number of opening for each round and the opening time for each round), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the corresponding winning symbol this time. The number of winnings) and the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region are selected. The opening pattern of the big winning opening for each winning symbol, the operation pattern of the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region, and the interval time between rounds are as described in the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the big hit shown in FIG. The number of counts (maximum number of winnings) in one round is basically about 10, but winnings rarely occur during opening for an extremely short time (about 0.1 seconds) (impossible). It's not, but it's extremely difficult).

Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol at the time of the jackpot selected in the previous jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 20). Specifically, if "16 rounds probability variation symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16. Further, if "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" or "12 round normal symbol" is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 12. Further, if "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are selected as the winning symbols, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 6. The number of execution rounds set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76 using the corresponding value in the program.

Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 counts the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation region timer (counting the probability variation region opening time) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Timer) is set. The value of the timer set here is the opening time of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 and the opening time of the probability variation region. If a time of about 20.0 to 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability change area timer, the opening time is the entry into the big winning opening or the probability change during one opening. It is a sufficient time for the passage of the region to easily occur (for example, a time for 10 or more game balls to be launched by the launch control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the jackpot opening timer and the probability variation area timer, the opening time is not impossible to enter the big winning opening or pass through the probability variation area during one opening. In both cases, it is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the firing control board set 174) that hardly occurs (becomes difficult).

Step S5210: Then, the main control CPU 72 temporarily sets the jackpot interval timer and the probability variation region interval timer (temporarily changing the probability variation region) based on the jackpot opening pattern and the operation pattern of the probability variation region solenoid 99 set in the previous step S5204. Set a timer to count the waiting time for closing). The value of the timer set here is the waiting time between rounds during the jackpot or the temporary closing time of the probability variation area.

Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process, and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 28).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the big winning opening at the time of big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand prize opening interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it is possible to confirm whether or not the large winning opening interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the large winning opening interval timer set in the following step S5314 is already operating. can.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the large winning opening interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Specifically, based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. 19, a drive signal applied to the first winning opening solenoid 90 or the second winning opening solenoid 97 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S5303: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 29) is executed.

Step S5303a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer set in step S5314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the probabilistic region interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the probability variation region interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5304.

Step S5304: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area opening process. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is output based on the operation pattern of the variable winning device during the jackpot shown in FIG. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is opened, and the game ball can be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5305: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation area timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the probability variation area timer set in the previous jackpot opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 29) is executed.

Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S5307a. To execute.

Step S5307a: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the probability variation region opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the probability variation area timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the open timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 performs step S5308. Run.

On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation area timer is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5307b.

Step S5307b: The probabilistic region closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning opening or the second large winning opening that is open) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round during a big hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, since the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 repeatedly executes the steps S5301 to S5310. do.

When it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time of the large winning opening has ended (Yes), or when it is confirmed in step S5310 that the number of counts has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312. ..

Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first prize opening or the second prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 or the second special winning opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 shifts from the open state to the closed state.

Step S5313: The main control CPU 72 executes the probability variation region closing process. Specifically, a process of stopping the output of the drive signal applied to the probability variation region solenoid 99 is executed. As a result, the blade member 31d for the probability variation region is closed, and the game ball cannot be guided to the probability variation region arranged inside the second variable winning device 31.

Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the big winning opening interval timer and the probability variation area interval timer set in the big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 29) at the time of big hit.

Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the grand prize opening interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the large winning opening interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control The CPU 72 returns to the end address of the variable winning device management process (FIG. 28) at the time of a big hit. Then, when the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit is executed in the next call, the step S5314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S5301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the large winning opening interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter. The value of the open count counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76, for example, with the initial value set to 0.

Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after the increment has reached the number of times set in the current round. Here, the "number of times set in the current round" is determined, for example, "the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened a plurality of times in one round during the big hit". This is to correspond to the open pattern. In this embodiment, such an opening pattern is not adopted, and the "number of times set in the current round" is set once in each round. Therefore, in each round during the jackpot game, the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), so that the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

On the other hand, when the pattern of repeating the opening / closing operation a plurality of times in one round is adopted, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jump destination is set to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the present stage, so the steps from step S5301 to step S5320 are repeatedly executed. do. As a result, the increment of the open count counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S5322.

Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit big winning opening closing process, and returns to the big hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the jackpot variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the jackpot jackpot closing process.

[Closed the big prize opening at the time of big hit]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the big winning opening at the time of a big hit. This big hit big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. As a result, for example, the value of the round number counter is "1" at the stage where the first round is completed and the second round is approached.

Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the round number counter after increment has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after incrementing, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after subtracting 1), (No). Then, step S5405 is executed.

Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the value of the current round number counter. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command.

Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit.

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the jackpot opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the jackpot game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 28). To execute. Then, after executing the jackpot opening / closing operation process at the time of a big hit, the main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot again after executing the jackpot closing process at the time of a jackpot, and repeatedly executes steps S5402 to S5408. do. As a result, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (9 or 16 times).

When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5410.

Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the round number counter, the next jump destination is set to the jackpot end process.

Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the variable winning device management process at the time of big hit. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of big hit]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the jackpot end processing. This big hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes the jackpot end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of jackpot has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the jackpot end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process (FIG. 28).

After that, when the value of the jackpot end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the jackpot end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the jackpot flag (00H). As a result, the jackpot game state ends on the control process of the main control CPU 72. Further, the main control CPU 72 erases "big hit" from the internal state flag here, and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control process. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation count status.

Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the previous switch input event processing (step S28 in FIG. 14).

Step S5508: When the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of probability fluctuations (for example, 170 times). The set value of the number of probability fluctuations is stored in, for example, the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the number-cutting counter value. The probability fluctuation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the special symbol variation (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. In the present embodiment, since a substantial upper limit is set in the high-probability state, the winning result may not be obtained in the high-probability state and the game may return to the low-probability state (so-called number-cut probability change). If the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 20) during the above special symbol change preprocessing.

Step S5512: Then, when the value of the time reduction function operation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 100 times or 170 times). Here, which time reduction number is set depends on the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag. That is, if the value of the probability variation function activation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 170 times as the number of time reductions (high probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means), and the value of the probability variation function activation flag. If is not set, 100 times are set as the number of time reductions (low probability time reduction state transition means, advantageous game state transition means). However, even if the value of the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, the main control CPU 72 sets 100 times as the number of time reductions when the winning symbol corresponds to the 6-round probability variation symbol 2 (advantageous game). State transition means, special state transition means). The value of the set time reduction number is stored in the time reduction count area of the RAM 76. The time reduction number set here is the upper limit number of times for shortening the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the subsequent games. If the value of the time reduction function operation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state specification command based on various flags. Specifically, when the jackpot flag is reset or the major winning combination ends, a state specification command indicating "normal" is generated as the game state. If the probability fluctuation function operation flag is set, a state specification command indicating "high probability is in progress" is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function operation flag is set, the internal state is "time reduction in progress". Generates a state specification command that represents. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the effect command transmission process.

Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the jackpot opening pattern setting process at the time of a jackpot.

Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the jackpot variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, the details of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the variable winning device management process at the time of small hit. The small hit variable winning device management process includes a small hit game process selection process (step S6100), a small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). , The configuration includes a group of subroutines for the small hit large winning opening closing process (step S6400) and the small hit ending process (step S6500).

Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S6200 to step S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small hit variable winning device management process as the return destination address in the stack pointer. .. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. do. On the other hand, if the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300) as the next jump destination, and the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). If the opening / closing operation process of the winning opening is completed, the large winning opening closing process (step S6400) at the time of a small hit is selected as the next jump destination. Further, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation processing and the small hit large winning opening closing processing are repeatedly executed over the set continuous operation number, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit end processing (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Large winning opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the large winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, each procedure will be described.

Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets the “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the "small hit opening pattern", for example, the opening pattern of "0.1 second opening" is set for the first time and the second time, respectively. Since there is no concept of "round" for "small hit", "opening pattern" is also described as "first opening" and "second opening".

Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times the large winning opening is opened to, for example, two, based on the large winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in, for example, the buffer area of the RAM 76.

Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit release timer. The value of the timer set here is the opening time for each operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hit opening timer, and in such an opening time, a prize is hardly generated in the large winning opening during one opening (difficult). It is a short time (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the firing interval of the game ball by the launching device unit).

Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets the small hit time interval timer. The value of the timer set here is the waiting time for each time when the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to, for example, about 2 seconds.

Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). Then, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening opening / closing operation processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the opening / closing operation process of the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S6314 below is already in operation, it is possible to confirm whether or not the interval timer is in the countdown.

As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the drive signal applied to the first special winning opening solenoid 90 is output. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 operates to shift from the closed state to the open state.

Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the release timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 34) is executed.

Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next steps S6308. To execute.

Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes the winning ball number counting process. In this process, the number of game balls that have won a prize in the first variable winning device 30 (the first major winning opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the value of the count number based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (10). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (the upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit). If the count number has not reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the jump destination is set to the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process at this stage, so that the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of steps S6301 to S6310. Execute repeatedly.

If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has ended (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count number has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time for the release at the time of a small hit, the main control CPU 72 normally steps before confirming that the count number has reached a predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined that the opening time has ended in S6306.

Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first grand prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize opening solenoid 90 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 returns from the open state to the closed state.

Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes the interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the countdown of the interval timer set in the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 34).

Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less, and if the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is variable at the time of small hit. It returns to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 33). Then, when the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the step S6314 is directly executed by jumping from the first step S6301. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening closing process, and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process. Then, when the small hit variable winning device management process is executed next, the main control CPU 72 then executes the small hit large winning opening closing process.

[Large winning opening closing process at the time of small hit]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for closing the large winning opening at the time of a small hit. This small hit large winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or ending the operation. Hereinafter, the procedure will be described.

Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the open count counter.

Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the open count counter after increment has reached the set open count. The number of times of opening is set in the previous large winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 34). If the value of the open count counter has not reached the set open count (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the large winning opening opening / closing operation process at the time of a small hit.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33).

When the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, which is the next jump destination, in the small hit game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 33). To execute. Then, after executing the small hit large winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small hit large winning opening closing process until the actual number of opening reaches the set number of opening (2 times). , The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

When the actual number of times of opening at the time of a small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6418.

Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets (= 0) the release count counter, the next jump destination is set to the small hit end process.

Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hit end process is selected this time.

[End processing at the time of small hit]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the end processing at the time of small hit. This small hit end process is for adjusting the conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value in the small hit end time timer, and then counts down the timer (for each call of this module) with the passage of time.

Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the end time at the time of small hit has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 33).

After that, when the value of the small hit end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hit end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), and erases "small hit in progress" from the internal state flag to end the small hit game. In the case of a small hit, the internal condition device does not operate, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of clearing the flag.

Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small hit large winning opening opening pattern setting process.

Step S6512: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 18) in the special symbol game process to the special symbol change pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small hit variable winning device management process.

[Game flow (1)]
FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "12 round normal symbols" or "12 round probabilistic symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the normal mode.
When starting the game with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from the [F1] normal mode. In the "normal mode", the winning probability of the special symbol is the "low probability state", and the winning probability of the normal symbol is the "low probability state". In this way, the [F1] normal mode is in the "low probability non-time shortened state". Therefore, by inserting the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26, the first special symbol starts to fluctuate and the game is started. It will proceed.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F2] "12 round normal symbol", [F3] 12 round jackpot game (battle bonus) will be executed, and you will be defeated in the battle of [F4] big role production. , [F5] Shift to coastal mode.

[F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortened state. In the [F5] coastal mode, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F6] special symbol fluctuates 100 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

In [F1] normal mode, if you win the jackpot of [F7] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", [F3] 12 round jackpot game (battle bonus) is executed, and [F8] in the battle of the big role production. win.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the 6th round of the [F9] 12-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [F10] V prize has occurred is executed, and the [F11] fireworks are displayed. Move to the rush.

[F11] The fireworks rush is in a state of shortening the time with high probability. In the [F11] fireworks rush, if the winning result is not obtained and the [F12] special symbol fluctuates 170 times, the mode shifts to the [F1] normal mode.

On the other hand, if [F13] "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [F10] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and the mode shifts to [F5] coast mode.

[Game flow (2)]
FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a game flow developed when "16 round probability variation symbols" or "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" are applicable in the fireworks rush or coastal mode.
If you win the jackpot of [G1] "16 round probability variation symbol" in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G2] 16 round jackpot game (special bonus) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the 6th round of the [G3] 16-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G4] V prize has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, although it corresponds to the [G5] 16-round probability variation symbol, if the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when the V prize is not won), the [G6] V prize does not occur. The effect indicating that is executed is executed, and after the jackpot game is completed, the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode.

If the jackpot of [G10] "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is won in [F5] coast mode or [F11] fireworks rush, [G11] 6 round jackpot game (normal bonus effect) is executed.

Then, when the game ball passes through the probability variation region in the 6th round of the [G12] 6-round jackpot game (when the V prize is won), the effect indicating that the [G13] V prize has occurred is executed, and the jackpot game ends. Later, it shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.

On the other hand, if [G14] "6 rounds probability variation symbols 1 and 2" is applicable, but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area in the 6th round of the jackpot game (when V is not won), [G15] V An effect indicating that no prize has been generated is executed, and then the mode shifts to the [F5] coast mode. Although not shown in particular, it corresponds to "6 round probability variation symbol 2", and when it shifts to the fireworks rush and 100 fluctuations elapse, it shifts to the normal mode, but internally it becomes a high probability non-time shortened state. ing.

It should be noted that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow and does not cover all the game flows.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the fluctuation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, since the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lit / blinking by the 7-segment LED, they lack the apparent appealing power. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, a variable display effect using an effect symbol is performed.

The effect symbols include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each production pattern is, for example, a design of a picture card with a character attached to the numbers "1" to "9". Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all form a symbol sequence in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of "9" to "1". Such a symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area on the screen.

FIG. 40 is a continuous view showing an example of an effect image corresponding to the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol. It should be noted that here, regarding the fluctuation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (missing), an example of the variation display effect and the stop display effect (result display effect) performed by using the effect symbol is shown. This variable display effect corresponds to a series of effects performed from the start of the variable display to the stop display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol is used, but the second special symbol may be used). do. Further, the stop display effect is an effect of expressing the stop display of the special symbol and the result of the internal lottery at that time as a combination of the effect symbols. Here, first, before explaining the specific contents of the control process, the basic flow of the variation display effect and the stop display effect for each variation adopted in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before fluctuation display]
In FIG. 40 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to fluctuate (a state in which the demonstration effect is not in progress), a large row of three effect symbols is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[Memory display effect]
Further, in the pre-variation display area X1 at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers (reference numerals M1 and M2 are added in the drawings) indicating the operating memory numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed. ing. Each of the markers M1 and M2 represents the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (the number of displayed numbers of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). Therefore, the number of displayed items increases or decreases in accordance with the change in the number of working memories during the game.

Further, in the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (○) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart. It is displayed as a figure of. In the illustrated example, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed to indicate that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are hidden (indicated by a broken line). Indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (memory display effect).

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the figure) is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are "fourth effect symbols" following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the change display of the effect symbols. It should be noted that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are merely colored simple marks (for example, the figure of "□"), and the variable display can be expressed by changing the display color, for example. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

Further, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color). This is for objectively clarifying that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually "6 round jackpot", "12 round jackpot", or "16 round jackpot" instead of "missing", the corresponding modes (for example, blue display color or red display color). Etc.), and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Start of variable display production]
In FIG. 40 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling and fluctuating the three symbol rows on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means). That is, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the row of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol scrolls (flows) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 to display the variation. The production starts. Further, the markers M1 and M2 are displayed in the pre-variation display area X1 of the band-shaped portion in the lower portion of the liquid crystal display 42 before the start of the fluctuation, but are displayed in the lower left portion of the liquid crystal display 42 after the start of the fluctuation. It moves to the changing display area X2 due to the pedestal image, and continues to be displayed until the change of the special symbol (effect symbol) is stopped and displayed (memory image display maintenance effect). In the figure, the variable display of the effect symbol is simply indicated by a downward arrow. In addition, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), so that the background image (background image) of the effect symbol is displayed in an easily visible state on the display screen at this time. Has been done.

The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character dressed in a yukata sits on a chaise longue and relaxes as if it were cool in the evening. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, a "normal mode". In the present embodiment, the "normal mode" corresponds to a normal state in which the time saving function is inactive and the probability variation function is also inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for the production, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (state display production execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal "time reduction state" or a "high probability state". Although not particularly shown here, the advance notice effect may be performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen, for example.

Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the fourth symbol Z1 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variable display by changing the display color.

[Stop the left symbol]
In FIG. 40 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) elapses, the left effect symbol first stops fluctuating. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "8" has stopped at the left side position of the screen. Note that the background image is not shown here (the same applies thereafter).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in FIG. 40 (B) above, the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, so that the number of markers M1 displayed is increased accordingly. It has been reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memory numbers by then, only one of the earliest (oldest) stored number displays in the marker M1 is moved to the changing display area X2, and the effect consumed by the internal lottery is also combined. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the working memory number has been consumed for the first special symbol in terms of production.

Then, in the example of FIG. 40 (C), the marker M1 at the head in the storage order moves to the changing display area X2, so that the remaining three displays in the pre-changing display area X1 are displayed. The three markers M1 remaining on the screen are shifted in one direction (to the left in this case) by one each. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories is accurately expressed in the production, and the player is told that "the working memory is consumed and reduced by one" and "the working memory is consumed and the special symbol is displayed." Can be taught intuitively and in an easy-to-understand manner.

[Right production pattern stop]
In FIG. 40 (D): Following the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol stops fluctuating thereafter. In this example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "3" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been confirmed that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear from the appearance that this fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns, etc. are excluded. The "slip pattern" is, for example, once the production symbol representing the number "7" is stopped, then the symbol row slides by one symbol and the production symbol representing the number "8" is stopped, thereby developing into reach. It is to do. Alternatively, once the effect symbol representing the number "9" is stopped, the effect symbol representing the number "8" is stopped by sliding the symbol sequence in the opposite direction by one symbol, and as a result, a pattern that develops into reach is also possible. be. In addition, when a character appears on the screen and the right effect symbol sequence is changed again after the effect symbol representing a completely distant number such as "5" is temporarily stopped, the number "8" is displayed. There is also a pattern in which the production pattern stops and develops into reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 40 (E): The last middle effect symbol is stopped in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode, the production symbol is also stopped and displayed in the non-winning (missing) mode. Will be That is, in the illustrated example, it means that the effect symbol representing the number "1" has stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is "8"-"1"-"3". Since it is an outlier, it is expressed in the production that this change corresponds to the usual "outlier". At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode corresponding to the detachment (for example, a white display color).

Further, when the stop display effect is performed, the marker M1 that has moved to the changing display area X2 and continued to display is also hidden. Therefore, it is possible to intuitively and easily teach the player that "the change of the special symbol has been completed".

The above is an example of a variable display effect and a stop display effect (at the time of non-winning) performed by using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally, the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

Further, although the above-mentioned example is for a non-winning case, at the time of a big hit (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in the mode of the big hit in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) internally selected by the main control CPU 72. Is selected.

[Example of production at the time of big hit]
Next, an example of production at the time of a big hit (winning) will be described.
FIG. 41 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of the super reach effect executed during the variable display of the special symbol. The super reach effect is a reach effect performed with a variation display in which a medium variation time (eg, 50-100 seconds) is selected.

Here, the flow of the super reach effect executed at the time of a big hit will be described, but the super reach effect is executed at a relatively low ratio not only at the time of a big hit but also at the time of a miss. Further, here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the advance notice effect (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

In the following reach effect, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the fluctuation display according to the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, the first special symbol is the mode of the jackpot (for example, "self", "yo" of the 7-segment LED. , "Mouth", "Snake", "F", "E", "L", "Γ", etc.) is executed until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). In FIG. 41, each effect symbol is shown simply by a number. Further, the markers M1 and M2, the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2, the pre-variation display area X1 and the in-variation display area X2 are not shown (the same applies to the following drawings). Hereinafter, the explanation will be given along with the flow of the production.

[Variable display effect]
In FIG. 41 (A): For example, in substantially synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the rows of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from above) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The variable display effect is started by scrolling to the bottom).

[Preliminary notice before reach occurs (1st stage)]
In FIG. 41 (B): Next, in the relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach advance notice effect using the character's picture image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach advance notice effect is a notice effect in which the mode changes stepwise from the first stage to a plurality of stages (for example, the second to fifth stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in this pre-reach advance notice effect is located in front of the effect pattern that is variablely displayed on the screen, and is displayed so as to appear from the left edge of the screen, for example (other modes of appearance). It may be.). In addition, the "pre-reach notice" here means to give a notice of the possibility of reach or the possibility of a big hit before any of the effect symbols is stopped and displayed. By executing such a "pre-reach advance notice effect", it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may develop into reach = the possibility of a big hit increases".

[Pre-reach notice production (second stage)]
In FIG. 41 (C): After the first stage mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect is executed, the change of the pre-reach advance notice effect mode is subsequently advanced to the second stage. Here, as the second stage notice effect before the occurrence of reach, an effect using a picture image of a character different from the previous one is performed. Specifically, another picture image additionally appears from the right edge of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed picture image. Further, the pattern image displayed at this time is larger in size than the previously displayed pattern image. Then, the character represented by the picture image emits a line (for example, "become a reach"), which is also produced by acoustic output.

The pre-reach advance notice effect (second stage) using such a second pattern image goes one step further from the pre-reach advance notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. 41 (B) above. It's an advanced type. The mode of "pre-reach notice production" that develops in this way is generally referred to as "step-up notice" or the like. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach advance notice effect, but in an effect mode in which the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear one after another and are displayed. There may be. Further, for example, each time the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage picture images appear and are displayed one after another, the size may be expanded. Even at this stage, the variable display of the effect pattern is continued. In any case, it is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) of a big hit due to this change by advancing the change of the mode of the pre-reach advance notice effect to more stages. (For example, when it progresses to the 5th stage, it suggests the maximum degree of expectation, etc.).

[Stop of left effect design]
In FIG. 41 (D): The mid-term of the variable display effect is approaching, and the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped soon. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the left side of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach state]
In FIG. 41 (E): Then, following the left effect symbol, for example, the variable display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, since the effect symbol representing the number "5" is stopped at the position on the right side of the screen, the reach state of "5"-"changing"-"5" has occurred. Then, an image emphasizing one line in the reach state is also displayed on the screen. In addition, a production such as "reach!" Is output at the same time.

After the reach state occurs, the reach effect at the time of winning is executed (however, the result of winning has not been displayed yet at this point). In the reach effect, only the effect symbols corresponding to the tempered numbers (here, "5") are displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at each of the four corners of the screen.

[Notice production after reach occurs (1st time)]
In FIG. 41 (F): After a while after the reach state occurs, for example, a post-reach notice effect (first time) is performed in which images representing "heart" figures form a group and pass diagonally on the screen. .. In this case, since the image of the "heart group" is suddenly displayed on the screen as if flowing, it is possible to enhance the visual appeal to the player. By executing the advance notice effect after the occurrence of such a visually lively reach notice, it is possible to obtain an effect of giving the player a greater sense of expectation.

[Progress of reach production]
In FIG. 41 (G): Following the advance notice effect after the first reach occurs, for example, images representing the numbers "2" to "6" are displayed on the screen in a three-dimensional row. From the beginning (front), the images of numbers are erased from the screen in the order of "2", "3", "4", and so on. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (implying) or reminding the player that the number "5" is a "big hit" if it remains unerased until the end. Further, when the number "4" is erased and "5" remains in front of the screen, it means a "big hit", and when the number "5" is also erased, it means "off". In the case of deviation, for example, the number "6" is displayed on the screen after the number "5" is erased. Therefore, during this period, as the images are erased in the order of the numbers "2", "3", and "4", the player's sense of tension and expectation also increases. Then, if the number "4" is actually erased on the screen and the production progresses with the number "5" remaining on the screen, the possibility of a "big hit" increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at once.

[Notice production after reach occurs (second time)]
In FIG. 41 (H): When the reach production is approaching the final stage, the image of the character is suddenly displayed on the screen as if it were split into a large copy, and the character utters some kind of dialogue (or silently). After the reach occurs, a notice production (second time) will be performed. At this point, for example, the content of the reach effect is that "if the number" 5 "remains unerased, the possibility of a big hit of" 5 "-" 5 "-" 5 "increases". Therefore, by making a large image of the character appear at this timing, it is possible to obtain an effect that gives the player a sense of expectation that "it may be a big hit".

As a reach effect different from the above, for example, there is a development that "the numbers" 2 "to" 4 "are erased, and if the number" 5 "is left unerased at the end, it becomes a big hit". When the image of the character appears at such a timing, the effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that "the big hit may finally be near" can be obtained.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 41 (I): Then, the final middle effect symbol is stopped. In this example, by displaying the effect symbol representing "5" in the center of the screen, it is possible to convey to the player that it is a big hit.

In FIG. 41 (J): Then, for example, the stop display effect as the effect symbol is performed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, it is possible to teach the player that the final winning type has been determined in the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, it is possible to keep the player from not disclosing to the player which winning symbol was won.

If the result of the internal lottery is non-winning, the first special symbol, which is the object of this change, is stopped and displayed as a missed symbol, so that the effect symbol is also stopped and displayed in the same manner. In this case, by displaying numbers "4" and "6" other than "5" in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is performed to inform that the change did not result in a big hit. It should be noted that such an effect is executed as an "outlier reach effect".

[Example of production during a major role when it corresponds to "12 round normal design" etc.]
42 to 45 are continuous views partially showing an example of a large-scale production when the "12-round normal symbol" or the "12-round probability variation symbol 2" is applicable.

In the present embodiment, when the "12 round normal symbol" is applicable, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed in the major role production, and when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is applicable. The effect that the ally character defeats the enemy character is executed. The flow of the production will be described below in order.

[1st round]
In FIG. 42 (A): When the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect during the big role is started. In the illustrated example, the image of the ghost of the umbrella that is the enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, the image of the female character that is the ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and the image of the character "VS" is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. As a result, it is possible to teach the player that the battle effect will be started from now on.

Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol (here, the effect symbol of "5") is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 5 production symbols”.

[2nd round]
In FIG. 42 (B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised by the ghost of the umbrella and runs away, and disappears to the right side of the screen.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 42 (C): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle production during the big role progresses concretely. In the illustrated example, a female character takes out a fan (weapon), and a flame (aura) appears from the fan (weapon).

[4th round]
In FIG. 42 (D): Then, in the fourth round of the jackpot game, a ghost of an umbrella performs a special move in which a long tongue pops out of the mouth, and a female character greets the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with "12 round normal symbol", and if the female character wins, it means that it was a big hit with "12 round probability variation symbol 2". ing.

[5th round (when the 12th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 43 (E): In the case of winning in the "12th round normal symbol", the defeat effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, along with the characters "Defeat ...", the ghost of the umbrella is displayed in a large size, and the female character is displayed in a small size (friend character defeat production).

[6th round (when the 12th round normal symbol is won)]
In FIG. 43 (F): In the case of winning in the "12th round normal symbol", the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, a production is performed in which a female character utters a line such as "I will not lose next time!". This makes it possible to motivate the player to aim for a big hit again. In the 7th to 12th rounds of the jackpot game, the same re-challenge promotion effect as in the 6th round is executed.

In the sixth round when the player wins the "12th round normal symbol", the second variable winning device 31 opens, but since the opening time is set extremely short, the game ball passes through the probability variation region. There is no.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 43 (G): At the timing when the big hit game in the “12 round normal symbol” ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Fifth round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 44 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 44 (I): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31. , The game ball is guided by the vane member 31d for the probabilistic region and passes through the probabilistic region.

In FIG. 44 (J): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, the panda character raises the V mark for a blessing effect. Is executed. In the 7th to 12th rounds of the jackpot game, the same blessing effect as in the 6th round is executed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 44 (K): At the timing when the big hit game ends (during the end process), the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

The above is an example of the effect when the game ball safely passes through the probability variation area corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 2", but the game ball corresponds to the probability variation area even if it corresponds to "12 round probability variation symbol 2". If it does not pass through, the following production example will be obtained.

[Fifth round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 45 (L): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the victory effect is executed in the 5th round. Specifically, the female character is displayed large and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed small along with the characters "Victory !!" (Friend character victory production).

[6th round (when the 12th round probability variation symbol 2 is won)]
In FIG. 45 (M): In the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a "high probability time reduction state". Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. The game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

However, here, it is assumed that no game ball has entered the second variable winning device 31 by the end of the sixth round for some reason (not hitting right, jamming the ball, etc.). In this case, the game ball does not pass through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 45 (N): In this case, a failure effect in which the panda character utters the line "sorry" is executed. In addition, the failure effect is continued in the 7th to 12th rounds of the jackpot game.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 45 (O): At the timing (during the end process) when the big hit game in the "12 round probability variation symbol 2" ends, the big role end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after this is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Enter coastal mode!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the coast mode of the "low probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

Here, although the production example in the case of corresponding to "12 round probability variation symbol 1" is not particularly shown, the battle production is executed and the victory production is executed in the same manner as in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2". Alternatively, an effect other than the battle effect may be executed. Even in the case of "12 round probability variation symbol 2", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time in the 6th round, so when the game ball passes through the probability variation area, it rushes into the fireworks rush. In addition, in "12 round probability variation symbol 2", it is possible to obtain substantially 4 rounds of balls.

[Example of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 49 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode in which the player wins the "12-round probability variation symbol other than the normal symbol" and is transferred after the jackpot game when the game ball passes through the probability variation area during the jackpot game. Fireworks rush is in a state of high probability time reduction. Here, as an example, an example of production by the vertical fluctuation mode in the fireworks rush will be taken up. The flow of the production will be described below in order.

In FIG. 46 (A): For example, by performing the first variation display after the end of the big hit game, the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of "fireworks rush". The background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" in order to deeply impress the player with the motif of fireworks. It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed in the upper right portion of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 46 (B): Then, due to the end of the first fluctuation (at the time of non-winning) after the end of the big hit game, all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7". "). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 46 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the jackpot game is completed. In the fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state), the variable start winning device 28 is operated with high frequency, so as long as the player continues to hit right, the effect symbol accompanying the variable display of the second special symbol Variable display is often performed. In addition, if the result of winning is obtained in the fireworks rush, the reach production is executed and it becomes a big hit.

In the fireworks rush, the marker M1 and the marker M2 may be displayed by displaying the pre-variation display area X1 and the changing display area X2 as in the normal mode. This point is the same in the following coastal modes.

[Major role production (normal bonus production)]
FIG. 47 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big winning combination effect executed during a big hit game when it corresponds to “6 round probability variation symbol 1” or “6 round probability variation symbol 2”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 47 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, an effect symbol corresponding to the winning symbol this time (here, 2 effect symbols) is displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won in 2 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "normal bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and images related to festivals such as fan fans and drums are displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 47 (B): In the case of winning in "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or "6th round probability variation symbol 2", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which a female character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker" is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the 6th round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball launch is the same as in the previous rounds. Is obtained. Further, in the sixth round when the "6th round probability variation symbol 1" or the "6th round probability variation symbol 2" is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time, so that the second variable winning device 31 When the game ball enters the ball, the game ball is guided by the blade member 31d for the probability variation region and passes through the probability variation region.

In FIG. 47 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark is displayed on the upper right of the display screen. Blessing production is performed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 47 (D): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big winning combination end effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Major role production (special bonus production)]
FIG. 48 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role playing effect executed during a big hit game in the case of corresponding to the “16 round probability variation symbol”.

[1 round]
In FIG. 48 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big hit production of the content corresponding to the progress of the game called "big hit" is executed. In the big role production, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND1" is displayed on the screen. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbols corresponding to the winning symbols (here, 7 effect symbols) are displayed. In this way, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continue to teach the player the information that “the winning symbol was won with 7 production symbols”. In addition, the characters "special bonus" are displayed in the lower area of the display screen, and an image of a female character straddling a horse and performing a peace sign is displayed around the screen.

[6 rounds]
In FIG. 48 (B): In the case of winning in the "16 round probability variation symbol", the fireworks rush challenge effect is executed in the 6th round. If you succeed in this challenge production, you will enter the fireworks rush, which is a state with a high probability of shortening the time. Specifically, a production in which the hermit character utters a line such as "Aim for V Attacker!" Is executed. As a result, it is possible to convey to the player the playability of aiming at the second variable winning device 31. In addition, in the sixth round when the player wins the "16-round probability variation symbol", the second variable winning device 31 is opened for a long time, so that the profit from the ball can be obtained as in the previous rounds. Further, in the sixth round when the 16-round probability variation symbol is won, the solenoid 99 for the probability variation region operates so as to open the probability variation region for a long time. Therefore, when the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31, the game ball is released. It passes through the probabilistic region by being guided by the blade member 31d for the probabilistic region.

In FIG. 48 (C): Then, when the player continues to hit the right side and the game ball enters the second variable winning device 31 and passes through the probability variation area, a V mark appears next to the female character who jumps up. The displayed blessing effect is executed.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 48 (D): After that, when the jackpot game progresses smoothly and the final 16 rounds are entered, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of "ROUND 16" is displayed on the screen and the jackpot game is in progress. An effect image unique to is displayed. Further, in the lower right corner position of the screen, the effect symbol (7 effect symbols) as the "remaining eye" is continuously displayed.

[At the end of the big role]
In FIG. 48 (E): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big winning combination ending effect of the content that teaches the internal state to be transferred after that is executed. In the illustrated example, the text information "Fireworks rush rush!" Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big role end effect, it is possible to teach the player to shift to the fireworks rush in the "high probability time shortened state" as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Example of coastal mode production]
FIG. 49 is a continuous view showing an example of the production of the coastal mode. This coastal mode is a jackpot game after the end of the jackpot game when it corresponds to the "12 round normal symbol", or when the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area during the jackpot game which corresponds to any of the probability variation symbols. This is the mode that will be transitioned after the end of. The coastal mode is a "low probability time reduction state". Here, as an example, an example of production by the vertical fluctuation mode in the coastal mode will be taken up. The flow of the production will be described below in order.

In FIG. 49 (A): For example, after the jackpot game in the "12 round normal symbol" is completed, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the "coast mode" state. There is. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with images such as "sandy beach", "sea", and "mountain" as motifs in order to express the healing impression which is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variablely displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

In FIG. 49 (B): Then, due to the end of this change (at the time of non-winning), all the production symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning mode (for example, a white display color).

In FIG. 49 (C): Then, the next fluctuation is started. This coastal mode ends when the special symbol fluctuates 100 times without obtaining the winning result. When the coastal mode ends, it shifts to the normal mode with a low probability of non-time reduction. If the winning result is obtained in the coastal mode, the reach effect is executed and a big hit is obtained.

Next, the control processing executed by the effect control CPU 126 of the effect control device 124 will be described.

[CPU initialization processing in the effect control device]
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the CPU initialization process in the effect control device 124.

The CPU initialization process in the effect control device 124 is a process for adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 by clearing various information in the effect control device 124, and more specifically, when the effect control device 124 is started (more specifically). , When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1 or when the effect control device 124 is restarted for some reason), the effect control CPU 126 executes the operation. By executing the CPU initialization process, the realization of a stable effect in the pachinko machine 1 is guaranteed. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S300: The effect control CPU 126 releases the reset of the CPU. In order to guarantee the normal operation of the effect control device 124, the effect control CPU 126 resets the CPU after the power is turned on to the effect control device 124 until the output voltage rises normally to the operation guarantee level and the peripheral circuits are stabilized. During that time, the reset state is continued. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the program from operating in a state where the effect control device 124 is not stable. When the reset of the CPU is released, the execution of the control program in the effect control device 124 is started with this as an opportunity.

Step S310: The effect control CPU 126 executes the activation process. In the startup process, initial settings related to hardware, system operation settings, and the like are performed as initial settings required before various interrupt processes corresponding to the substance of the effect control are started. Specifically, for example, settings related to access to each register and I / O port of the effect control CPU 126 and each device connected to the effect control CPU 126 are made.

Step S320: The effect control CPU 126 executes the RAM initialization process. In the RAM initialization process, the RAM 130 (main memory) is initialized, various classes used in the execution process of the control program are initialized, the DRAM 191 is initialized, the command buffer is cleared, and the like.

Step S330: The effect control CPU 126 executes the task execution pre-processing. Here, the "task" refers to an individual process executed due to the occurrence of an interrupt. In the task execution pre-processing, preparations for executing the task are performed. For example, the effect control device 124 is provided with a plurality of LED lamps (hereinafter, referred to as “status LEDs”) that can be visually recognized from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the effect control device 124 uses these LED lamps. The internal state is notified by a plurality of lighting patterns, and the initial state of the status LED is set in the task execution preprocessing. In addition, the frequency of the command input / output port required for receiving the effect command transmitted from the main control device 70 is set, the RTC184 is set up, the interruption is permitted, and the like. When the task execution pre-processing is completed, the status LED lights up in a manner indicating the completion of the initialization processing, various effect commands can be received, and various interruptions occur to perform tasks related to effect control (hereinafter, "" It shifts to the state where the effect control task ") can be woken up.

In the effect control device 124, there are various types such as timer interrupts that occur at preset time intervals and event interrupts that occur due to the occurrence of a predetermined event on the effect control device 124. Interruption can occur. In the following description, interrupts that occur periodically at regular intervals (for example, timer interrupts, event interrupts that occur at regular cycles, etc.) are referred to as "regular interrupts". A priority is set in advance for each interrupt, and when an interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 126 controls the interrupt according to the priority and executes the corresponding interrupt process.

Step S340: The effect control CPU 126 executes the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, among the controls executed as the game progresses, other processes that are not executed in various tasks are performed. The contents of the effect control main process will be described later with reference to the following drawings.

As shown in FIG. 50, the effect control main process is incorporated in an infinite loop, and the effect control CPU 126 waits a predetermined execution interval after executing the effect control main process once, and then performs the next effect. The execution of the control main process is restarted. Therefore, unless the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is maintained and the effect control device 124 is restarted, the effect control CPU 126 continues to repeatedly execute the effect control main process. Further, in the above infinite loop, various interruptions are generated triggered by various factors, and the effect control CPU 126 executes processing according to each of the generated interruptions. In these processes, image display control on the liquid crystal display 42, audio output control on the speakers 54, 55, 56, 58, drive control of the lamps 45, 46, 48, 50, 52, 53 and the movable motor 57, etc. Is performed, and each device connected to the effect control device 124 is controlled, so that the effect content is constructed and the effect is embodied.

As described above, the infinite loop shown in FIG. 50 corresponds to the main loop in the effect control device 124, and the effect control main process is literally positioned as the main process executed in the effect control device 124. Therefore, in the following description, the infinite loop shown in FIG. 50 will be referred to as a “main loop for effect control”.

By the way, in the present embodiment, as described above, the NAND type SATA standard 64 Gbit ROM is adopted for the CGROM 190, but in the NAND type ROM, refreshing is executed when the power supply is started. The refresh is an operation for stably executing the reading of data from the NAND ROM, and is executed in parallel with the above-mentioned RAM initialization process and independently of the effect control CPU 126. Become.

Therefore, the effect control CPU 126 manages the elapsed time from the start of the RAM initialization process by the elapsed time timer, and from the start of the RAM initialization process until the time expected to be required for refreshing the CGROM 190 elapses (elapsed time). Until the timer expires), various controls are performed so as not to generate access to the CGROM 190. The time required to refresh the CGROM 190 is assumed to be 2.8 seconds (in the case of 64 Gbits), but in this embodiment, 4.6 seconds with a margin in consideration of the possibility of specification changes and the like. Is secured.

[Production control main processing]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control main process.
The effect control main process is a process incorporated in the effect control main loop, and is called and executed at regular intervals by the effect control CPU 126. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S370: The effect control CPU 126 executes the voltage control monitoring process. In the voltage control monitoring process, the effect control CPU 126 performs a monitoring process for canceling the interruption of the 5V signal supplied to the external driver in a fixed time. If a voltage is applied to the lamp or the movable body at the same time, the lamp or the movable body may generate excessive heat due to the inrush current, leading to malfunction or failure. Therefore, the timing of applying the voltage (timing of releasing the signal) is shifted to disperse the inrush current, and the lamp, the movable body, and the like are protected from heat generation.

Step S380: The effect control CPU 126 executes the watchdog clear process. In addition to being equipped with a watchdog timer IC188 connected to the effect control CPU 126 and a watchdog timer using the built-in function of the effect control CPU 126, the effect control device 124 is equipped with a watchdog timer by a control program. There is. That is, in the effect control device 124, three types of watchdog timers are operating, and whether each watchdog timer normally generates a periodic interrupt due to a different monitoring time (executed when the periodic interrupt occurs). Whether or not the periodic interrupt processing to be performed is executed normally) is monitored. In the watchdog clear process, the effect control CPU 126 clears all watchdog timers and the like when the periodic interrupt process is normally executed.

After completing the above procedure, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 50) and executes the effect control main process again. The effect control main process is executed at substantially constant intervals when the effect control device 124 is in a normal state. For example, in the normal state, in the effect control main process, the frame interrupt that occurs every 33.3 ms (16.6 ms interval occurs twice) is triggered by the frame interrupt while returning from the interrupt process that is separately executed. It is called every), and the processing of each step goes through in the meantime. Therefore, when each step of the effect control main process completes without delay, the effect control CPU 126 performs the standby process in the remaining time until the next effect control main process is called, and waits for the start process (sleep) during that time. Transition to the state. With the exhaustion of the remaining time, the effect control CPU 126 ends the standby process, returns to the main loop, and calls the next effect control main process.

[Periodic interrupt processing in the production control device]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of various periodic interrupt processes (Vsync interrupt process, frame interrupt process, phase interrupt process) executed by the effect control device 124.

In the effect control device 124, periodic interrupt processing corresponding to various periodic interrupts generated in a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, 520 μs to 33.3 ms cycle) is executed at regular intervals in the main loop of the effect control. Will be done. Hereinafter, each periodic interrupt process will be described with reference to a procedure example.

FIG. 52 (A) is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the Vsync interrupt process. The Vsync interrupt is an interrupt based on the input of an image signal (Vsync signal) periodically output from the VDP 152 at the timing of switching the effect image displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. It occurs 60 times per second (60 FPS), that is, once at 16.6 ms intervals. The effect control CPU 126 executes the Vsync interrupt process when the Vsync interrupt occurs. By the Vsync interrupt processing, the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 is switched at regular intervals.

Step S1300: The effect control CPU 126 sets the Vsync interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The Vsync interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used for confirming whether or not Vsync interrupt is normally generated, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1302: The effect control CPU 126 executes the Vsync interrupt control process. In the Vsync interrupt control process, various processes required for drawing the effect image on the VDP 152 and displaying it on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 are executed. The specific contents of the Vsync interrupt control process will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 50).

In FIG. 52 (B): It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a frame interrupt process. The frame interrupt is an interrupt that occurs 60 times per second (60 FPS), that is, once at 16.6 ms intervals. The effect control CPU 126 executes the frame interrupt process when the frame interrupt occurs.

Step S1310: The effect control CPU 126 sets the frame interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The frame interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not frame interrupt has occurred normally, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1312: The effect control CPU 126 executes the frame interrupt control process. In the frame interrupt control process, various tasks executed due to the frame interrupt process are controlled.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 50).

In FIG. 52 (C): It is a flowchart which shows the procedure example of a phase interrupt process. The phase interrupt is an interrupt for controlling the internal device of the effect control device 124, and occurs 1920 times per second (1920 FPS), that is, once at intervals of 520 μs. The effect control CPU 126 executes the phase interrupt process when the phase interrupt occurs.

Step S1320: The effect control CPU 126 sets the phase interrupt monitoring flag and sets the flag value to “1”. The phase interrupt monitoring flag is a flag used to confirm whether or not the phase interrupt has occurred normally, and is stored in the RAM 130.

Step S1322: The effect control CPU 126 executes the phase interrupt control process. In the phase interrupt control process, various tasks executed due to the phase interrupt are controlled.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control main loop (FIG. 50).

In this way, in any timer interrupt process, first, a monitoring flag for each interrupt process is set, and then various tasks executed due to the interrupt are controlled.

Next, an example of a control method for concretely realizing the effect will be described. The variable display effect, the reach effect, the advance notice effect, the memory display effect, the large role effect, and the like described with reference to the above-mentioned effect example are all controlled through the following control processes executed by the effect control device 124.

[Production control processing]
As described with reference to FIG. 7, the effect control device 124 has a function as an effect control processor (overall control unit) and a function as an effect reproduction processor (individual control unit), and these functions are provided. By linking, the operation of each device (display on the liquid crystal screen, sound output from the speaker, light emission by the lamp, operation of the movable body, etc.) is controlled, and the effect reproduction on the pachinko machine 1 is realized. The substance of the function is a separate task woken up by the effect control CPU 126.

For convenience of explanation, in the following description, the task that becomes the main operation when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect control processor (overall control unit) is referred to as "effect control unit 210", and the time progress of the effect is managed. The task to be performed is referred to as "time management unit (ACT) 230". Further, regarding the task that becomes the main operation when the effect control CPU 126 functions as the effect reproduction processor (individual control unit), the "display control unit 220" and the "voice control unit 222" are appropriately used according to the device to be controlled. , "Ramp control unit 224", "movable body control unit 226", "input control unit 228", etc., and these tasks (control units 220, 222, 224, 226, 228) are collectively referred to as " It may be referred to as "each individual control unit".

Here, in order to facilitate the understanding of the invention, a rough flow regarding the display control of the liquid crystal screen performed by the cooperation of the effect control unit 210, the ACT 230, the display control unit 220, and the like will be described with reference to the block diagram. FIG. 53 is a diagram simply showing the flow of the effect control process together with the block diagram, and among the configurations in the effect control device 124 shown in FIG. 7, the configuration related to the display control of the liquid crystal screen is extracted in detail. Shown.

The effect control unit 210 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control device 70, first selects an effect number to be executed according to the content, and controls the effect scenario data corresponding to the effect number 180. It is acquired from the above and set in the effect scenario setting area in the DRAM 191 and the effect scenario timer corresponding to the effect scenario data is set in the same area ((1) in FIG. 53).

Here, the "effect scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the production, and the "effect scenario timer" is a timer that is set to manage the progress of the production. In the production scenario data, a plurality of process data and start timings for starting processing based on each process data are registered in chronological order. In addition, each process data defines various messages (command information) for giving specific instructions regarding the effect (for example, start and end of the effect, change of display priority, etc.).

Then, the effect control unit 210 manages the progress of the effect according to the contents of the effect scenario data based on the effect scenario timer ((2) in FIG. 53), and instructs the reproduction of the effect according to the progress timing of the effect. Send a message. Specifically, the message included in the process data whose start timing has arrived is stored in the message buffer area in the RAM 130 ((3) in FIG. 53). The message stored in the message buffer area is transmitted by the ACT 230 to each individual control unit (display control unit 220, etc.) at a predetermined timing ((4) in FIG. 53).

On the other hand, each individual control unit analyzes the message transmitted from the effect control unit 210 (directly ACT230), and first, according to the content, the sub-scenario data corresponding to the effect number specified by the message. Is acquired from the control ROM 180 and set in the sub-scenario setting area in the DRAM 191 and the sub-scenario timer corresponding to the sub-scenario data is set in the same area.

Here, the "sub-scenario data" is information that defines the progress of the production by each production device (liquid crystal display, speaker, lamp, movable body, etc.), and the "sub-scenario timer" is , It is a timer set to manage the progress of the production by each production device. The sub-scenario data and the sub-scenario timer are set for each effect device. For example, the sub-scenario data (hereinafter, referred to as “display scenario data”) and the sub-scenario timer (hereinafter, referred to as “display scenario timer”) relating to the control of the liquid crystal display 42 referred to by the display control unit 220 are the DRAM 191. It is set in the display scenario setting area in ((5) in FIG. 53).

On top of that, each individual control unit manages the progress of the production by each production device according to the contents of the sub-scenario data based on the sub-scenario timer, and is more specific for each production device according to the progress timing of the production. Give instructions. In the display control of the liquid crystal screen, the display control unit 220 manages the screen display of the liquid crystal display 42 according to the contents of the display scenario data based on the display scenario timer ((6) in FIG. 53), and draws in the DRAM 191. A display list is constructed for the buffer designated as the construction area in the command buffer area ((7) in FIG. 53).

In response to this, various circuits built in the VDP 152 cooperate with each other to draw and display the screen. Specifically, first, when the display list constructed in the drawing command buffer is transferred to the preload circuit 154 ((8) in FIG. 53), the preload circuit 154 is used for one frame specified in the display list. The drawing material is transferred from the drawing material area in the CGROM 190 to the preload area in the DRAM 191 ((9) in FIG. 53). Next, the drawing circuit 155 (drawing means) acquires the drawing material that has been transferred to the preload area ((10) in FIG. 53), and puts it in the buffer designated as the drawing area in the frame buffer area in the VRAM 156. On the other hand, drawing is performed ((11) in FIG. 53). Finally, the display circuit 153 (display control means) switches the designation of the frame buffer designated in the drawing area to the output area ((12) in FIG. 53). As a result, the contents of the frame buffer are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (liquid crystal panel 42a).

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect control process.

The effect control process is called in the process of the frame interrupt control process (step S1312 in FIG. 52), and one of the frame interrupt control processes executed every 16.6 ms triggered by the occurrence of the frame interrupt. It is executed every other time, that is, every 33.3 ms (30 times per second = 30 FPS frequency).

The effect control process includes command reception process (step S400), timer update process (step S401), working memory effect management process (step S402), effect symbol management process (step S403), display control process (step S404), and input control. The configuration includes subroutines for processing (step S405), lamp control processing (step S406), voice control processing (step S408), effect random number update processing (step S410), and other processing (step S412). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along with each process.

Step S400: In the command reception process, the effect control unit 210 receives the effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. Further, the effect control unit 210 analyzes the received effect commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 for each type. The effect commands transmitted from the main control CPU 72 include, for example, a special symbol destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory increase effect command, a (special symbol) operation memory decrease effect command, and a start opening winning sound. Control command, demo production command, lottery result command, fluctuation pattern command, fluctuation start command, stop symbol command, confirmation command, status specification command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end production command, count cut counter value command, There are fluctuation pattern destination judgment command, stop display time end command, probability change area passage command, prize ball content command, RAM clear specification command, power return specification command, setting-related end specification command, production inspection start command, etc.

Step S401: In the timer update process, the effect control unit 210 subtracts 1 from the values of various timers managed in relation to the effect execution control (for example, the effect scenario timer) and updates the timer.

Step S402: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the memory display effect and the look-ahead advance notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S403: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control unit 210 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol, and during the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31. Control the content of the production. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect pattern of various advance notice effects (pre-reach advance notice effect, post-reach advance notice effect, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S404: In the display control process, the effect control unit 210 tells the display control unit 220 the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the operation memory effect pattern number, and the look-ahead notice effect). A message instructing the pattern number, the variation effect pattern number, the change notice effect number, the background pattern number, the pending deletion, etc.) is transmitted. In response to this, the display control unit 220 analyzes the received message, gives specific instructions regarding drawing to the VDP 152 according to the contents of the display scenario data based on the display scenario timer, and performs the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42. Control.

By the way, the control process related to the above drawing performed by the display control unit 220 is separately called in the process of the Vsync interrupt process (step S1302 in FIG. 52), and is called every 16.6 ms (60 times per second = 60 FPS). Is executed (at the frequency of). That is, the control process related to drawing is executed twice as often as the display control process (effect control process) that is executed every 33.3 ms (30 times per second = 30 FPS frequency). The specific contents of the control process (Vsync interrupt control process) related to drawing will be described in detail later with reference to another flowchart.

Step S405: In the input control process, first, the effect control unit 210 synchronizes with the scene in which the player requests an operation as the effect progresses, and the player sends an operation member such as the operation unit 60 to the input control unit 228. A message is sent instructing the detection of whether or not the operation is performed in the specified manner. In response to this, the input control unit 228 sets a period during which operations can be accepted for any of the operating members based on the content of the received message. In addition, the effect control unit 210 detects whether or not an operation (operation requested from the player) that matches the designated mode is performed, outputs the detection result, and returns it to the effect control unit 210.

Step S406: In the lamp control process, the effect control unit 210 first transmits a message instructing the effect content to the lamp control unit 224. In response to this, the lamp control unit 224 relays the LED driver 198 based on the content of the received message, outputs a specific drive signal to the driver IC 132, and drives various lamps (lighting or extinguishing, blinking, brightness). Gradation change, etc.).

Step S408: In the voice control process, the effect control unit 210 first transmits a message instructing the effect content to the voice control unit 222. In response to this, the voice control unit 222 gives an instruction of specific output contents to the voice IC 134 based on the contents of the received message, and outputs sounds (sound effects, BGM, etc.) according to the production contents from various speakers. Let me.

Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control unit 210 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The production random numbers include, for example, random numbers used for advance notice selection, random numbers used for a normal background change lottery (production lottery), and the like.

Step S412: In another process, for example, the effect control unit 210 first transmits a message instructing the movable body control unit 226 to indicate the content of the effect. In response to this, the movable body control unit 226 gives an instruction of specific control contents to the SMC 199 based on the contents of the received message. Further, the SMC 199 creates an operation pattern of various movable bodies based on an instruction from the movable body control unit 226, outputs a control signal corresponding to the operation pattern to the driver IC, and drives the various movable bodies. As a result, for example, the movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronization with the display of the image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

Through the above-mentioned effect control process, the effect control unit 210 can comprehensively control the effect content and the operation of each device that reproduces the effect in the pachinko machine 1. Then, the effect reproduction instruction (message transmission) by the effect control unit 210 is executed at a frequency of 30 FPS in the process of the effect control process, whereas the liquid crystal drawing process (display control unit 220) is performed in response to the instruction. The control process of the liquid crystal display 42) is executed at a frequency of 60 FPS separately from the effect control process. The reason why the execution frequency of each control process is different in this way is that the liquid crystal display 42 may be operated at 60 FPS (the effect is reproduced at 60 FPS), whereas other effect devices (various speakers, various types). This is because the lamp, the movable body, etc.) are operated at 30 FPS (the effect is reproduced at 30 FPS).

The other effect devices are controlled by the voice control unit 222, the lamp control unit 224, and the movable body control unit 226, and these controls are performed in synchronization with the liquid crystal drawing process by the display control unit 220. Specifically, one of the two executions of the liquid crystal drawing process synchronizes with the execution of the control process of the other effect device. With such control, it is possible to appropriately synchronize the effect reproduction by each device.

In the above example, the liquid crystal display 42 may be operated at 60 FPS, while the other devices are operated at 30 FPS, but the other devices are also operated at 60 FPS in the same manner as the liquid crystal display 42. It is also possible to let it. In that case, the execution frequency of the control process for the device operated at 60 FPS may be changed in the same manner as the execution frequency of the display control process (step S404) and the liquid crystal drawing process for the liquid crystal display 42. Further, when controlling a plurality of devices at 60 FPS, the effect control process itself may be changed to a configuration in which the effect control process itself is executed at a frequency of 60 FPS. Alternatively, the liquid crystal display 42 may be operated at 30 FPS like other devices.

Next, the contents of the processing executed in the effect control processing will be described.

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the working memory effect management process.
The operation memory effect management process is performed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 in conjunction with an increase or decrease in the number of lottery elements (operation memory number) stored in the main control device 70, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are performed. It is a process of updating the display of the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to (memory display effect executing means), and is called and executed in the process of the effect control process (step S402 in FIG. 54). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S700: First, the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a effect command for increasing the number of operating memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories increases. When it is confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S702. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for increasing the number of working memories is saved (step S700: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S702.

Step S702: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Step S704: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the effect command is received from the main control CPU 72 when the number of operation memories is reduced. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced. When it is confirmed that the effect command is saved when the number of working memories is reduced (step S704: Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S706. If it cannot be confirmed that the effect command for reducing the number of working memories is saved (step S704: No), the effect control unit 210 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect selection process when the number of working memories is reduced. In this process, the effect control unit 210 slides the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and changes the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery from the pre-variation display area X1. Select the effect to be moved to the middle display area X2. The storage marker moved to the variable display area X2 selects an effect to be erased at the end of the fluctuation.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 54).

[Production design management process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes execution selection process (step S500), effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), effect symbol change process (step S504), effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and variable winning device operation. The configuration includes a group of subroutines for processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along with each process.

Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the "jump table" as the return destination address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variation display effect has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol change pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the effect symbol change process (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol change process is completed, the effect symbol change process is completed. As the next jump destination, the effect symbol stop display processing (step S506) is selected. Further, the variable winning device operation process (step S508) includes a case where the large hit variable winning device management process (step S5000 in FIG. 18) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or a small hit variable winning device management process (FIG. 18). When step S6000) in the middle is selected, it is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

Step S502: In the effect symbol variation preprocessing, the effect control unit 210 performs an operation of adjusting the conditions for starting the variation display effect using the effect symbol. Further, in this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, fluctuation pattern, etc.), and the effect pattern for the advance notice effect (other than the look-ahead advance notice effect pattern). Select a pre-reach notice pattern, a post-reach notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the effect control unit 210 also controls the demonstration effect when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific contents of the processing will be described later using another flowchart.

Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 while executing a variable display effect using an effect symbol, the input control unit 228 monitors whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and responds to the result. The control information of the effect content (operation trigger effect, continuous hit effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220.

Step S506: In the process of displaying the stop display of the effect symbol, the effect control unit 210 controls the content of the stop display effect using the effect symbol and the moving image in an manner according to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control unit 210 instructs the display control unit 220 to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the display control unit 220 ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 via the VDP 152, and executes the stop display effect. As a result, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be instructed (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player in an effect (design effect execution). means). At the time of a small hit, the stop display effect can be executed in a manner similar to or similar to that of the loss.

Step S508: In the process when the variable winning device is activated, the effect control unit 210 controls the effect content during the small hit or the big hit (special game effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the effect during the major role according to various conditions (for example, the winning type). For example, in the case of a 16-round big hit, the effect control unit 210 selects a 16-round large-duty effect pattern as the effect content to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs the display control unit 220 of this. As a result, the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 displays an image of the effect during the important role, and the content of the effect changes as the round progresses.

[Pre-processing for effect pattern fluctuation]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the effect symbol variation preprocessing. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S600: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not a demo effect command has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the demo effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the demo effect command is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S602.

Step S602: The effect control unit 210 executes the demo selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects a demo effect pattern. The demo production pattern is a situation in which the game of the pachinko machine 1 is not in operation (the first and second special symbols are in a so-called customer waiting state where the number of operating memories of the first and second special symbols is 0, and the first and second special symbols are in operation. It defines the content of the effect to be executed when the number of working memories is 0 and the game is temporarily interrupted due to the passage of a predetermined time while the player's hand is away from the handle unit 16. .. Here, the condition that the first and second special symbols have not changed (stop display) may be added.

Step S603: The effect control unit 210 executes the setting suggestion effect management process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 controls the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the execution of the demo effect.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the address at the end of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect control process as it is, and in the subsequent display control process (step S404 in FIG. 54) and the lamp control process (step S406 in FIG. 54), the content of the demo effect is displayed based on the demo effect pattern. Control.

On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demo effect command is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S604.

Step S604: The effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S612. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control unit 210 executes step S606. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the fluctuation this time is out of order based on the fluctuation pattern command and the stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the out-of-order normal variation or the out-of-reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is out of order. Alternatively, if the stop symbol command this time specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation this time is out of order.

Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), then the effect control unit 210 confirms whether or not this fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control unit 210 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of a big hit is saved. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is saved (Yes), the effect control unit 210 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not saved (No), only the lottery result command at the time of small hit remains. In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S608. .. It is also possible to confirm whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit based on the fluctuation pattern command or the stop symbol command. That is, if the current fluctuation pattern command corresponds to the jackpot fluctuation, it can be determined that the current fluctuation is a jackpot. Further, if the stop symbol command of this time corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the fluctuation of this time is a jackpot.

Step S608: The effect control unit 210 executes a small hit time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "C0H00H" to "D0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control unit 210 refers to the effect pattern selection table (not shown) and selects the effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time. Can be done. The effect pattern number may be prepared as a pair with the variation pattern command, or a plurality of effect pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

Further, when the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and changes the effect pattern variation schedule (variation time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the effect effect pattern number at that time. Determine the mode of stop display. In addition, all the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to "combination of symbols at the time of small hit".

The above procedure corresponds to a "small hit", but when it corresponds to a big hit, the effect control unit 210 confirms that it is a "big hit" in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control unit 210 executes step S610.

Step S610: The effect control unit 210 executes the jackpot variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern commands (for example, "E0H00H" to "F0H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. In the jackpot effect pattern selection process, the process may be further branched according to the jackpot stop symbol.

In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. That is, when the effect control unit 210 confirms that there is a deviation in step S604 (Yes), the effect control unit 210 then executes step S612.

Step S612: The effect control unit 210 executes the effect time variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control unit 210 determines the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection based on the variation pattern command (for example, "A0H00H" to "A6H7FH") received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of disconnection are classified into "outlier normal fluctuation", "time saving outlier variation", "outlier reach variation", etc., and further, a fine reach variation pattern is defined in "outlier reach variation". Which effect pattern number the effect control unit 210 selects is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

When the effect pattern number at the time of disconnection is selected, the effect control unit 210 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the variation schedule of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation effect pattern number at that time (variation time, presence / absence of reach occurrence, reach occurrence). In this case, the reach type and reach occurrence timing) and the mode of stop display (for example, "7"-"2"-"4", etc.) are determined.

When any of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control unit 210 then executes step S614.

Step S614: The effect control unit 210 executes the advance notice selection process (notice effect execution means). In this process, the effect control unit 210 selects the content of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display effect this time by lottery. The content of the advance notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of the internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). The advance notice effect is to give a notice to the player that a reach state may occur during the variable display effect, or to give a notice that there is a possibility of a big hit in the end. Therefore, the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the advance notice effect is set relatively high in order to raise the expectation of the player at the time of winning.

When the above procedure is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent processing during effect symbol variation (step S504 in FIG. 56), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various types are executed. The advance notice effect is executed based on the advance notice effect pattern.

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is operated. The variable winning device operating time processing is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S902), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904), variable winning device operating processing (step S906), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S908). It is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the processing at the time of operating the variable winning device will be described along with each processing.

Step S902: In the execution selection process, the effect control unit 210 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any of step S904 to step S908) from the "jump table". For example, the effect control unit 210 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operation process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the variable winning device operation pre-processing has not been started yet, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S904) as the next jump destination. If the variable winning device operation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S906) as the next jump destination. Further, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control unit 210 selects the post-processing after operating the variable winning device (step S908) as the next jump destination.

Step S904: In the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control unit 210 executes a process of selecting the content of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. For example, in the case of winning in the "12 round normal symbol", the process of selecting the effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is executed. In addition, in the case of winning in "12 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", a process of selecting an effect in which the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Further, in the case of winning in "6 round probability variation symbols 1 and 2", the process of selecting the normal bonus effect is executed. Furthermore, in the case of winning in the "16 round probability variation symbol", the process of selecting the special bonus effect is executed.

Step S906: In the process during operation of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 generates control information instructed to the display control unit 220 as needed. For example, when performing an effect using the operation unit 60 during the execution of the jackpot effect, the input control unit 228 is made to detect whether or not the operation unit 60 is operated by the player, and the effect content (operation trigger effect) according to the result is detected. , Continuous hitting effect, linked operation effect, etc.) is instructed to the display control unit 220. Further, in the process during operation of the variable winning device, when a probability variation area passing command is received during the big hit game, an effect indicating that a V winning has occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 44 (J) or the like) is selected. While executing the process, if the probability variation area passage command is not received during the jackpot game, the process of selecting the effect indicating that the V prize has not occurred (the effect shown in FIG. 45 (N) or the like) is selected. To execute.

Step S908: In the post-operation processing of the variable winning device, the effect control unit 210 executes an effect of transmitting the mode of the transition destination to the player during the end time of the variable winning device. For example, the effect control unit 210 executes a coast mode rush effect or a fireworks rush rush effect depending on whether or not a winning symbol or a probability variation region has passed. Specifically, when a probability change area passage command is received during the jackpot game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the fireworks rush is entered (effect shown in FIG. 44 (K) or the like) is executed, and the jackpot is executed. If the probability variation area passage command is not received during the game, a process of selecting an effect indicating that the player is entering the coastal mode (effect shown in FIG. 43 (G) or the like) is executed.
When the above processing is completed, the effect control unit 210 returns to the effect symbol management process (FIG. 56).

[Vsync interrupt control processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the Vsync interrupt control process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1400: The display control unit 220 executes the display scenario timer update process. In this process, the display control unit 220 subtracts 1 from the display scenario timer set in the display scenario setting area in the DRAM 191 and updates it based on the message from the effect control unit 210.

Step S1402: The display control unit 220 executes the frame buffer switching process. In this process, the display control unit 220 switches the frame buffer to be output. Specifically, the display control unit switches the designation of the frame buffer specified in the drawing area from the drawing area to the output area of the two frame buffers, and specifies the frame buffer specified in the output area. Switch from the output area to the drawing area. By this processing, the contents of the frame buffer designated in the output area are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 by the display circuit 153 (display processing is executed) (display control means).

Step S1404: The display control unit 220 executes the drawing command buffer switching process. In this process, the display control unit 220 switches the drawing command buffer to be transferred. Specifically, the display control unit 220 switches the designation of the drawing command buffer specified in the construction area from the construction area to the transfer area among the two drawing command buffers, and the drawing command specified in the transfer area. Switch the buffer specification from the transfer area to the construction area.

Step S1406: The display control unit 220 executes the transfer / drawing start process. In this process, the display control unit 220 instructs the drawing circuit 155 in the VDP 152 to start the process. As a result, the drawing circuit 155 starts the drawing process in the current frame, and the drawing material for one frame transferred to the preload area in the DRAM 191 is used to draw in the frame buffer designated in the drawing area. Further, the transfer of the constructed display list to the drawing command buffer designated in the transfer area for the preload circuit 154 in the VDP 152 is started.

Step S1408: The display control unit 220 executes the preload start process. In this process, the display control unit 220 instructs the preload circuit 154 to start the process. As a result, the preload circuit 154 starts the preload processing in the current frame, and the drawing material for one frame specified in the transferred display list is transferred (data transfer from the CGROM 190 to the preload area in the DRAM 191). NS.

Step S1410: The display control unit 220 executes the command construction task wake-up process. In this process, the display control unit 220 makes settings for waking up the command construction task. As a result, the command construction task is woken up and the execution of the command construction process is started.

[Command construction process]
FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the command construction process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1430: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not an unanalyzed message exists. As a result of the confirmation, if there is an unanalyzed message (step S1430: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1432. On the other hand, when there is no unanalyzed message, that is, when all the messages have been analyzed (step S1430: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1438.

Step S1432: The display control unit 220 executes the display scenario setting process. In this process, the display control unit 220 refers to any one of the unanalyzed messages, acquires the display scenario data corresponding to the effect number specified by the message from the control ROM 180, and puts it in the display scenario area in the DRAM 191. At the same time, set the display scenario timer corresponding to the display scenario data in the same area.

Step S1434: The display control unit 220 confirms whether or not there is unprocessed drawing material among the display scenario data to be processed in the current frame corresponding to the value of the current display scenario timer. do. As a result of the confirmation, if there is an unprocessed drawing material (step S1434: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1436. On the other hand, when there is no unprocessed drawing material, that is, when all the drawing materials have been processed (step S1434: No), the display control unit 220 returns to step S1430 again and analyzes all the messages. The procedure after step S1430 is repeated until the process is completed.

Step S1436: The display control unit 220 executes the material unit drawing command construction process. In this process, the display control unit 220 builds a drawing command for any one of the unprocessed drawing materials. Then, when the drawing command is completed, the process returns to step S1434, and the steps after step S1434 are repeated until all the drawing materials are processed.

At this time, when the display control unit 220 detects a 3D drawing material (hereinafter, referred to as “3D drawing material”), the display control unit 220 stores it in a predetermined area in the RAM 130. Here, the "drawing material for 3D" refers to each drawing material for the right eye and the left eye prepared to generate a 3D composite material capable of realizing a stereoscopic display using the parallax of both eyes. Is.

In the present embodiment, the 3D drawing material and other drawing materials can be distinguished from each other by the name. For example, the 3D drawing material is given a name starting with "3D_" (see CGROM 190 in FIG. 53), and the display control unit 220 selects the 3D drawing material from the name in the process of processing the drawing material. Can be detected. The flow of the process of synthesizing the 3D drawing material to generate the 3D composite material will be described later with reference to another drawing.

Step S1438: The display control unit 220 executes the display list construction process. In this process, the display control unit 220 constructs a display list used for the preload process in the next frame in the drawing command buffer designated in the construction area. Specifically, the display control unit 220 constructs a display list by arranging the drawing commands for one frame constructed for each material in the above step S1436 in a predetermined order.

Step S1440: The display control unit 220 executes the 3D composition function switching process. In this process, the display control unit 220 determines whether or not the display list constructed in the previous step S1438 includes a drawing material for 3D composition (hereinafter, referred to as "material for 3D composition"). Switches the 3D composition function ON / OFF.

After completing the above procedure, the display control unit 220 returns to the processing of the caller.
The above procedure example is just an example, and it is possible to execute the command construction process according to a different procedure.

[3D composition function switching process]
FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the 3D composition function switching process. Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1460: The display control unit 220 refers to the information in the predetermined area in the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the 3D drawing material is included in the display list constructed in the current frame. As a result of the confirmation, when the drawing material for 3D is included (step S1460: Yes), the display control unit 220 executes step S1462. On the other hand, when the 3D drawing material is not included (step S1460: No), the display control unit 220 executes step S1464.

Step S1462: The display control unit 220 switches the 3D composition function to ON (enables the 3D composition function). Here, the "3D composition function" means that the size of the drawing material is enlarged or reduced without using the scaling function (hereinafter, referred to as "VDP scaler") mounted on the VDP 152 when performing 3D drawing. It is a function that realizes with a unique configuration.

Step S1464: The display control unit 220 switches the 3D composition function to OFF (disables the 3D composition function).

As a result, the state of the 3D composition function in the current frame is transmitted from the display control unit 220 to the VDP 152.

After completing the above procedure, the display control unit 220 returns to the command construction process (FIG. 60) of the caller.

[Mask source material information correction processing]
FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the mask source material information correction process.
The mask source material information correction process is a process called and executed when the mask source material is detected in the process of drawing process (step S1406 in FIG. 59) in the current frame by the drawing circuit 155 (drawing means). .. Here, the "mask source material" is a material for masking another drawing material (shielding the other part in order to extract a specific part). Hereinafter, a procedure example will be described.

Step S1500: The drawing circuit 155 sets the mask source material detection flag to ON.

Step S1502: The drawing circuit 155 backs up (copies) the material information of the mask source material. The material information is backed up for, for example, the synthesis buffer area in the VRAM 156.

Step S1504: The drawing circuit 155 confirms whether or not the 3D synthesis function is ON (effective) based on the information transmitted from the display control unit 220 to the VDP 152. When the 3D synthesis function is ON, it means that the VDP scaler is not used.

As a result of the confirmation, when the 3D synthesis function is ON, that is, when the VDP scaler is not used (step S1504: Yes), the drawing circuit 155 executes step S1506. On the other hand, when the 3D synthesis function is OFF, that is, when the VDP scaler can be used, the drawing circuit 155 executes step S1508.

Step S1506: The drawing circuit 155 corrects the coordinate values of the four points forming the vertices of the backed-up mask source material according to the size ratio between the mask application destination and the mask source material. The correction mode of the mask source material information will be described in detail later with reference to another drawing.

Step S1508: The drawing circuit 155 uses a VDP scaler. In this case, the VDP scaler automatically enlarges or reduces the size of the material to which the mask is applied.

When the above procedure is completed, the drawing circuit 155 returns to the processing of the caller.

[Flow of 3D drawing material composition process]
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a flow of a synthesis process of a drawing material for 3D. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 63 (A): The 3D right eye material is a drawing material on which a picture to be shown to the right eye is drawn, and the 3D left eye material is a drawing material on which a picture to be shown to the left eye is drawn. Is. For convenience of explanation, in the following figures, the 3D right eye material is represented by gray staining, and the 3D left eye material is represented by black staining.

Not limited to the 3D drawing material, the drawing material is often prepared in a size smaller than the size at the time of drawing in the buffer. By doing so, the amount of data of each drawing material can be suppressed, and the number of drawing materials stored in the CGROM 190 can be increased by that amount to expand the range of expression.

In FIG. 63 (B): The 3D right eye material is drawn in the frame buffer area in the VRAM 156, while the 3D left eye material is drawn in the synthesis buffer area in the VRAM 156. At this time, both the 3D right eye material and the 3D left eye material are enlarged and drawn to the size specified in the display list. Since the 3D composition function is effective when drawing the 3D drawing material, the VDP scaler is not used to enlarge each drawing material, and the enlargement is performed by directly rewriting the material information of each drawing material.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the frame buffer area and the synthesis buffer area, a sub-pixel array consisting of 1024 sub-pixels arranged in the height direction according to the size of the liquid crystal panel 42a is 3840 in the width direction. A storage area corresponding to this lined-up configuration is secured for each. Of these sub-pixel strings, the odd-numbered sub-pixel sequence from the left is used as the display area for the material for the right eye, and the even-numbered sub-pixel sequence from the left is used as the display area for the material for the left eye. ..

In FIG. 63 (C): Mask data for masking information drawn in the display area (odd-numbered sub-pixel string from the left) of the material for the right eye with respect to the buffer area for composition (hereinafter, “3D composition”). "Mask for use") is applied. The 3D synthesis mask is developed in advance in the mask buffer area in the VRAM 156 when the power is turned on, and is copied from the mask buffer area and applied to the synthesis buffer area. In the mask for 3D composition, a mask value (a value for shielding (hidden)) is set in the odd-numbered sub-pixel sequence from the left side, and a non-mask value is set in the even-numbered sub-pixel sequence from the left. A value (value for not shielding (displaying)) is set.

In FIG. 63 (D): A 3D composite material is generated in the frame buffer area by synthesizing the contents drawn in the composition buffer area with the contents drawn in the frame buffer area. In the generated 3D composite material, the material for the right eye is drawn in the odd-numbered sub-pixel sequence from the left side, while the material for the left eye is drawn in the sub-pixel sequence even-numbered from the left side. When such a 3D synthetic material is displayed on the liquid crystal panel 42a and visually recognized through the lenticular sheet 42b, the image becomes three-dimensional due to the parallax of both eyes.

[Correction mode of mask source material information]
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a correction mode of the mask source material information.

In FIG. 64 (A): An example of the mask source material is shown. This mask source material is a material for hollowing out the mask application destination material (material to be masked) in a circular shape, and is applicable to both 3D synthetic materials and ordinary drawing materials. .. The four coordinates forming each vertex of the mask source material are, for example, a point O (x ₁ , y ₁ ), a point P (x ₂ , y ₂ ), a point Q (x ₃ , y ₃ ), and a point R. Let it be (x ₄ , y ₄ ).

In FIG. 64 (B): The material shown on the right side is a 3D composite material generated by synthesizing 3D drawing materials (right eye material and left eye material) according to the flow described in FIG. 63. .. In the present embodiment, when masking the 3D composite material (applying the mask source material), the size of the mask source material is adjusted by correcting the coordinate information of the mask source material without using the VDP scaler. Expanding.

Specifically, if the size of the mask source material in the width direction (composition width) is w_cmp and the size of the mask application destination material in the width direction (panel width) is w_pnl, the enlargement ratio ex in the width direction is "panel width". It is represented by "w_pnl / composition width w_cmp". If the size of the mask source material in the height direction (composition height) is h_cmp and the size of the mask application destination material in the height direction (panel height) is h_pnl, the enlargement ratio ey in the height direction is "panel height". It is represented by "h_pnl / composition height h_cmp".

When the mask application destination material is displayed in full screen, the panel width w_pnl matches the size in the width direction of the liquid crystal panel 42a, and the panel height h_pnl matches the size in the height direction of the liquid crystal panel. It becomes.

In FIG. 64 (C): Of the material information of the mask source material backed up in the process of the mask source material information correction process (step S1502 in FIG. 62), the coordinate values of points O, P, Q, and R are used. On the other hand, the enlargement ratio ex in the width direction (X-axis direction) and the enlargement ratio ey in the height direction (Y-axis direction) are applied to correct each coordinate value. Specifically, the coordinates of these four points O, P, Q, and R are the point O'(x ₁ * ex, y ₁ * ey) and the point P'(x ₂ * ex, y ₂ * ey). , Point Q'(x ₃ * ex, y ₃ * ey), point R'(x ₄ * ex, y ₄ * ey).

In this way, by correcting the coordinate information of the mask source material according to the size ratio between the mask application destination and the mask source material, the size of the mask source material can be enlarged according to the size of the mask application destination material. This makes it possible to appropriately mask the material to which the mask is applied even while the 3D composition function is active.

[Flow of mask processing of 3D synthetic material (embodiment)]
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing the flow of mask processing of the 3D synthetic material in the embodiment. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 65 (A): When masking the 3D composite material, the mask source material is applied to the 3D composite material drawn on the frame buffer according to the flow described with reference to FIG. 63. The size of the mask source material may or may not match the size of the 3D synthetic material. In the illustrated example, the size of the mask source material does not match the size of the 3D synthetic material.

In FIG. 65 (B): The mask source material is drawn in the composition buffer area. At this time, the coordinate information of the four points forming each vertex of the mask source material is corrected according to the size ratio between the mask application destination and the mask source material according to the mode shown in FIG. 64, so that the mask source material is 3D synthesized. It is enlarged and drawn according to the size of the material.

In FIG. 65 (C): The mask source material drawn in the composition buffer area is applied to the 3D composition material drawn in the frame buffer area, so that the 3D composition material masked in the frame buffer area (substantially circular). 3D synthetic material that has been hollowed out) is generated.

As described above, according to the embodiment, the 3D composite material can be appropriately masked, and the effect image can be drawn as intended.

[Flow of mask processing of 3D synthetic material (Comparative Example 1)]
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the flow of mask processing of the 3D synthetic material in Comparative Example 1. Comparative Example 1 is significantly different from the embodiment in that the material information of the mask source material is not corrected. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 66 (A): As in the case of the embodiment, the mask source material is applied to the 3D composite material drawn on the frame buffer according to the flow described with reference to FIG. 63.

In FIG. 66 (B): The mask source material is drawn in the composition buffer area. At this time, the material information of the mask source material is not corrected. Therefore, the size of the mask source material drawn in the composition buffer area may not match the size of the 3D composition material drawn in the frame buffer area as shown in the illustrated example.

In FIG. 66 (C): In this state, the mask source material drawn in the composition buffer area is applied to the 3D composition material drawn in the frame buffer area, so that the frame buffer area is in the upper left. A 3D synthetic material is produced in which a part of the material is hollowed out in a circular shape while the other areas except the upper left portion are maintained as they are.

As described above, depending on Comparative Example 1, the 3D composite material may not be properly masked, and the intended drawing result may not be obtained.

[Flow of mask processing of 3D synthetic material (Comparative Example 2)]
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flow of mask processing of the 3D synthetic material in Comparative Example 2. Comparative Example 2 is significantly different from the embodiment in that the size of the drawing material is changed by using the VDP scaler instead of the original configuration. Hereinafter, the description will be given in chronological order.

In FIG. 67 (A): In Comparative Example 2, the 3D right eye material and the 3D left eye material, which are the sources of the 3D synthetic material, are the same as in the case of the embodiment, but these 3D drawing The material is drawn in the frame buffer area and the composition buffer area in the original size without being enlarged, and the 3D composition mask is applied to the frame buffer area, so that the 3D composition is performed in the original size. Then, the mask source material is applied to the 3D synthetic material in this state.

In FIG. 67 (B): The mask source material is drawn in the composition buffer area. At this time, the material information of the mask source material is not corrected. Therefore, the size of the mask source material drawn in the composition buffer area may not match the size of the 3D composition material drawn in the frame buffer area.

In FIG. 67 (C): In this state, the mask source material drawn in the composition buffer area is applied to the 3D composition material drawn in the frame buffer area. At this time, the VDP scaler automatically adjusts the size of the mask source material according to the size of the 3D synthetic material. Therefore, in the frame buffer area, a masked 3D synthetic material (a 3D synthetic material hollowed out in a substantially circular shape) is generated in an unenlarged state.

In FIG. 67 (D): The masked 3D composite material generated in the frame buffer area is magnified by the VDP scaler. The 3D composite material before being enlarged is a material in which the material for the right eye and the material for the left eye are drawn alternately one row at a time for the sub-pixel rows arranged in the width direction. The 3D composite material is drawn by stretching it on the frame buffer at super resolution. Although the stretched 3D synthetic material is automatically corrected by the function of the VDP scaler, the correction does not work effectively and the 3D synthetic material is in a broken state. With such a 3D synthetic material, it is difficult to achieve normal stereoscopic viewing even through the lenticular sheet 42b.

In the enlargement of the drawing material using the VDP scaler, in the case of a normal drawing material not for 3D, the automatic correction by the function of the VDP scaler works effectively even if the super-resolution is stretched. For example, if the above mask source material is applied to a normal drawing material and then enlarged by the scaling function of VDP, the drawing material hollowed out in a substantially circular shape is displayed beautifully even when enlarged at super resolution. can do. However, in the case of a 3D synthetic material, the super-resolution is stretched and the automatic correction by the VDP scaler does not work effectively. Therefore, when the image is enlarged using the VDP scaler, the display looks like a broken 3D synthetic material. Cannot function properly. As described above, in Comparative Example 2, the masked 3D composite material cannot be appropriately enlarged, and it is difficult to draw as intended.

In contrast to these Comparative Examples 1 and 2, in the above-described embodiment, the material information of the mask source material, more specifically, the coordinate information of the four points forming each vertex of the mask source is corrected according to the 3D composite material. Therefore, the mask source material is enlarged and drawn in a form that matches the size of the 3D composite material. Then, since the mask is applied to the 3D synthetic material on that, the 3D synthetic material can be appropriately masked. Therefore, according to the embodiment, it is possible to appropriately control the screen display of the liquid crystal display 42.

[Execution timing of each process related to drawing]
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing execution timing of each process (command construction process, preload process, transfer / drawing process, display process) related to drawing.

The number of frames attached to the arrows in the figure is the number of frames ahead when the processing of the arrow with the characters "± 0 frames" is the starting point, and the processing of the other arrows is viewed from the starting point. Is shown. For example, the arrow indicating the display process of the first frame is attached with the character "± 0 frame", and the arrow indicating the transfer / drawing process is attached with the character "+1 frame". This indicates that the transfer / drawing process of the first frame is a process (for the second frame) for the first frame ahead when viewed from the display process of the first frame.

When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in the first frame triggered by the first Vsync interrupt C1, the display process executes the display (for the first frame) for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process for the next frame. Transfer / drawing (for the 2nd frame) is executed, preload processing is executed for the 2nd frame ahead (for the 3rd frame), and command construction processing is for command construction (for the 4th frame) for the 3rd frame ahead. Is executed.

The same applies to the second and subsequent frames. When the Vsync interrupt control process is executed in each frame, the display process executes the display for the current frame, and the transfer / drawing process executes the transfer / drawing for the next frame and preloads. In the process, preload is executed for 2 frames ahead, and in the command construction process, command construction for 3 frames ahead is executed.

By normally executing each process in this way, the content of the command construction executed in the first frame is displayed in the fourth frame.

As described above, according to the above-described embodiment, there are the following effects.
(1) According to the present embodiment, while the 3D composition function is active (when it is in the ON state), the coordinate information of the mask source material is used as the mask application destination and the mask source without using the VDP scaling function. By correcting according to the size ratio with the material, the size of the mask source material is expanded according to the size of the mask application destination, so mask the mask application destination material appropriately even while the 3D composition function is enabled. It is possible to draw the effect image as intended.

(2) According to the present embodiment, when the 3D composition function is disabled (when it is in the OFF state), the drawing material can be enlarged by using the scaling function of VDP, and automatic correction is applied. , It is possible to perform drawing suitably while suppressing the calculation cost required for drawing.

The present invention can be variously modified and implemented without being limited to the above-described embodiment. The mode of production and various numerical values given in one embodiment are merely examples, and are not limited to the above-mentioned contents.

In the above-described embodiment, an example of correcting the coordinate information of the mask source material to enlarge the mask source material while the 3D composition function is enabled has been described, but the coordinate information is corrected while the 3D composition function is enabled. The drawing material to be enlarged is not limited to the mask source material. When the drawing material other than the mask source material is enlarged while the 3D compositing function is active, the drawing material can be appropriately enlarged by the same method.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to distinguish between the 3D drawing material and other drawing materials, an example in which the 3D material is given a name starting with "3D_" has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. However, it is also possible to distinguish between the 3D drawing material and other drawing materials based on other information.

In the above-described embodiment, 3840 pixels in the width direction × 1024 sub-pixels SP in the height direction (1280 pixels in the width direction × 1028 pixels P in the height direction) are arranged in a grid pattern on the liquid crystal panel 42a, and this size. The sizes of the frame buffer area and the composition buffer area are set according to the above, but the size of the liquid crystal panel 42a and these buffer areas is not limited to this, and can be appropriately changed depending on the situation.

In the above-described embodiment, the present invention has been described as an example of applying the present invention to a gaming machine having a probability variation region, but the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine not having a probability variation region. It is also possible to apply the present invention to a so-called simultaneous turning machine.

The images given in the other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately deformed. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the figure, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately deformed.

1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game status display device 42 Liquid crystal display 42a Liquid crystal panel 42b Wrench circular sheet 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU
130 RAM
152 VDP
180 control ROM
190 Image / Audio ROM (CGROM)
191 DRAM
210 Production control unit 220 Display control unit

Claims (2)

Display means that can display production images and
When drawing a production image including a first material obtained by synthesizing a material for the right eye and a material for the left eye using binocular parallax and a second material different from the first material, the above-mentioned A drawing means for correcting predetermined information regarding the second material based on the relationship between the predetermined attributes of the first material and the second material, and
A gaming machine provided with a display control means for displaying an effect image drawn by the drawing means on the display means. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The drawing means
A gaming machine characterized in that the coordinate information of the second material is corrected based on the size ratio of the first material and the second material.

Images